No preview available
HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 8296 DOWNTOWN RESTROOMS - OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING (2)SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR DOWNTOWN RESTROOMS - OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING BID NO. 8296 PURCHASING DIVISION 215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS MAY 13, 2016 – 3:00 P.M. (OUR CLOCK) Financial Services Purchasing Division 215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 970.221.6775 970.221.6707 fcgov.com/purchasing CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Pages BID INFORMATION 00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00020-1 - 00020-2 00100 Instruction to Bidders 00100-1 - 00100-9 00300 Bid Form 00300-1 - 00300-3 00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00400-1 00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 - 00410-2 00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00420-1 - 00420-3 00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors 00430-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00500 Agreement Forms 00500-1 00510 Notice of Award 00510-0 00520 Agreement 00520-1 - 00520-6 00530 Notice to Proceed 00530-1 00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1 00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 - 00610-2 00615 Payment Bond 00615-1 - 00615-2 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00630-1 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00635-1 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00640-1 00650 Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) 00650-1 - 00650-2 00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 00670-1 - 00670-2 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 General Conditions 00700-1 - 00700-34 Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 - 00800-2 00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00900-1 00950 Contract Change Order 00950-1 - 00950-2 00960 Application for Payment 00960-1 - 00960-4 SPECIFICATIONS DUST PREVENTION AND CONTROL MANUAL SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID Date: April 21, 2016 Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as OWNER), at the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on May 13, 2016, for the Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building; BID NO. 8296. If delivered, they are to be delivered to 215 North Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If mailed, the mailing address is P. O. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580. At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be publicly opened and read aloud. The Contract Documents provide for the construction of Bid 8296. The Work consists of the deconstruction of an existing restroom facility and the construction of a new 398 square foot restroom facility complete with related site work. All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with the City of Fort Collins, 215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524. The City encourages all disadvantaged business enterprises to submit bid in response to all invitations and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, national origin. Questions concerning the scope of the bid should be directed to Project Manager, Ron Kechter, at (970) 221-6105 or rkechter@fcgov.com. Questions regarding bid submittal or process should be directed to Elliot Dale, Buyer at (970) 221-6777 or edale@fcgov.com. All questions not addressed at the prebid, must be submitted in writing via email to Ron Kechter , with a copy to Elliot Dale, no later than 5:00 PM our clock on May 5, 2016. Questions received after this deadline will not be answered. The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at: • Rocky Mountain E-Purchasing System: www.rockymountainbidsystem.com The City of Fort Collins has adopted a new Dust Prevention and Control Manual. The manual can be found at: http://www.fcgov.com/purchasing/pdf/dust_prevention_control_manual.pdf or within the project documents. All operations conducted under this Agreement shall be performed in accordance with the stated procedures and requirements. Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents. The Work is expected to be commenced within the time as required by Section 2.3 of General Conditions. Substantial Completion of the Work is required as specified in the Agreement. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the performance of the Contract. No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of forty-five (45) days after the date fixed for opening Bids. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities and irregularities therein. Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid in the form specified in the Instructions to Bidders. Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council, shall have a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property, equipment, material, supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises directly or indirectly any decision- making authority concerning such sale or any supervisory authority over the services to be rendered. This rule also applies to subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift, gratuity favor, entertainment, kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has or is seeking to do business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited. City of Fort Collins Gerry Paul Purchasing Director SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.0 DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the locations identified in the Invitation to Bid. 2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and 00430 fully executed. 2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including financial data, a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the contract. The Statement of Qualifications shall be prepared on the form provided in Section 00420. 3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the services required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide the service promptly and within the time specified without delay or interference, (3) the character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder, (4) the quality of the bidder's performance of previous contracts or services, (5) the previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws and ordinances relating to the contract or service, (6) the sufficiency of the financial resources and ability of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the service, (7) the quality, availability and adaptability of the materials and services to the particular use required, (8) the ability of the bidder to provide future maintenance and service for the use of the subject of the contract, and (9) any other circumstances which will affect the bidder's performance of the contract. 3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former Work so that no just claims are pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged on any other Work which would impair his ability to perform or finance this Work. 3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with the City or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City. 4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (c) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-4.2. 4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA. 5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted in writing to the Engineer and the OWNER. Interpretation or clarifications considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued only by Addenda. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of the Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project should be directed to the Engineer. Questions regarding submittal of bids should be directed to the City of Fort Collins' Purchasing Division. 5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or Engineer. 5.4. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as having received the Bidding documents. 6.0 BID SECURITY 6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in the amount stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the form of a certified or bank cashier's check payable to OWNER or a Bid Bond on the form enclosed herewith. The Bid Bond must be executed by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions for surety bonds. 6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required contract security within 15 days of the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have reasonable chance receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of the seventh day after the effective date of the Agreement or the thirty-first day after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid Security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven days after the Bid opening. 7.0 CONTRACT TIME. The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to be substantially complete and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the Contract Times) are set forth in the Agreement. 8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. 9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the "effective date of the Agreement". The procedure for submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal subcontractors he proposes to use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430 contained within these Documents. 10.2. If OWNER or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Bid price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to make any substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors. Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or organization listed and to whom OWNER or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier or other persons or organizations against whom he has reasonable objection. The use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by OWNER prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work. 11.0 BID FORM. 11.1. A copy of the Bid Form is bound in the Contract Documents which may be retained by the Bidder. A separate unbound copy is enclosed for submission with the Bid. 11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take precedence. Unit prices shall govern over extensions of sums. 11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the corporate name. 11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form. 11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). 11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. 11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 12.0 BID PRICING. Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules. 13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS. 13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project title, Bid No., and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security, Bid Form, Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule of Subcontractors as required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association. 14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS. 14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 14.2. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an authorized representative provided he can prove his identity and authority at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 14.3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 15.0 OPENINGS OF BIDS. Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available after the opening of Bids. 16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE. All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid Opening, but OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. 17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT. 17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. 17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the evaluated lowest base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the lowest Bid total for the Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for sum of all schedules. Only one contract will be awarded. 17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening. 18.0 CONTRACT SECURITY. The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required Contract Security. 19.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT. When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER hall deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification. 20.0 TAXES. OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the Contract Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary Conditions. 21.0 RETAINAGE. Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement. 22.0 PURCHASING RESTRICTIONS. Purchasing restrictions: The Bidder's authorized signature of this Bid assures the Bidder's compliance with the City's purchasing restrictions. A copy of the resolutions is available for review in the Purchasing and Risk Management Division or the City Clerk's office. A. Cement Restrictions: City of Fort Collins Resolution 91-121 requires that suppliers and producers of cement or products containing cement to certify that the cement was not made in cement kilns that burn hazardous waste as a fuel. 23.0 COLLUSIVE OR SHAM BIDS. Any Bid deemed by the City in its sole discretion to be a collusive or sham Bid will be rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of this Bid assures that such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid. 24.0 BID RESULTS. For information regarding results for individual Bids send a self-addressed, self-stamped envelope and a Bid tally will be mailed to you. Bid results will be posted in the Purchasing office seven (7) days after the Bid Opening. END OF SECTION SECTION 00300 BID FORM SECTION 00300 BID FORM PROJECT: 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building Place: Date: 1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to all conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company, Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the State of Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules. 2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or persons Bidding for the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, the Agreement, the detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which have been examined by the undersigned. 3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in the sum of ($ ) in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and Instructions to Bidders. 4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date when the written notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate surety with which the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified performance and payment Bonds is as follows: . 5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list. 6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents. 7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. through . 8. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid) LUMP SUM BASE BID $ IN WORDS: 9. PRICES The foregoing prices shall include all labor, materials, transportation, shoring, removal, dewatering, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the complete Work in place of the several kinds called for. Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to delete items in the Bid or change quantities at his sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total Agreement Price. RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED: CONTRACTOR BY: Printed Date Title Phone number Email address License Number (If Applicable) (Seal - if Bid is by corporation) Attest: Address Telephone Email SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00410 Bid Bond 00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications 00430 Schedule of Subcontractors SECTION 00410 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned as Principal, and , as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $ for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors, and assigns. THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the City of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building. NOW THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. Surety Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals this day of , 20__, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above. PRINCIPAL SURETY Name: Address: By: By: Title: Title: ATTEST: By: (SEAL) (SEAL) SECTION 00420 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Permanent main office address: 3. When organized: 4. If a corporation, where incorporated: 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of Work performed by your company: 8. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. Are you debarred by any government agency? If yes list agency name. 11. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type of construction. 12. List your major equipment available for this contract. 13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project: 14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including officers: 15. Credit available: $ 16. Bank Reference: 17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the OWNER? 18. Are you licensed as a General Contractor? If yes, in what city, county and state? What class, license and numbers? 19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract? If yes, what percent of total contract? And to whom? 20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time? IF yes, DETAIL 21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL What company? 22. What are your company's bonding limitations? 23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at ________________ this ______ day of __________________, 20__. Company: By: Printed: Title: State of County of being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name) (Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ day of____________, 20__. (Seal) Notary Public My commission expires: . SECTION 00430 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over 15% of the contract. ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed SECTION 00510 NOTICE OF AWARD DATE: [Date] TO: [Contractor] PROJECT: 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER") You are hereby notified that your Bid dated [Contractor's Bid Date] for the above project has been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an Agreement for 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building. The Price of your Agreement is ($ ). Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by [Date]. 1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your signature on the cover of the page. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and Supplementary Conditions. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1) fully-signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Gerry Paul Purchasing Director SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year] and shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City. The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and [Contractor] (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR) OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building and is generally described in Section 01010. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by RB+B Architects, 315 E Mountain Ave., Suite 100, Fort Collins, CO 80524. The City of Fort Collins Operations Services is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES 3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Completed by the Contractor, in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions, as evidenced by the issuance of certificate of Substantial Completion, within One Hundred Twenty (120) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 3.2 The Work must be completed by the Contractor and ready for final payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions within Thirty (30) calendar days after Substantial Completion. 3.3. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence under this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 and 3.2 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated Damages for delay (but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter. 1) Substantial Completion: One Hundred FiftyDollars ($150) for each calendar day or fraction thereof after the date of Substantial Completion as provided in Section 3.1 above. 2) Final Acceptance: One Hundred FiftyDollars ($150) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that after the date of Final Acceptance as provided in Section 3.2 above. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows: ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and incorporated herein by this reference. ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole discretion of Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the application Section 00520 Page 3 for payment. 5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions or as provided by law. 5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. 6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions. 6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the definition of “Contract Documents” in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions, and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. 7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the following: 7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion 7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance 7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases 7.2.4 Consent of Surety 7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate 7.2.6 Application for Payment 7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows: The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated. 7.4. Addenda Numbers to , inclusive. 7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. 7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS 8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Document. 8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document. OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] By: By: GERRY PAUL PURCHASING DIRECTOR PRINTED Date: Title: Date: Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL) City Clerk Address for giving notices: P. O. Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 Attest: Approved as to Form Address for giving notices: Senior Assistant City Attorney License No.: SECTION 00530 NOTICE TO PROCEED Description of Work: 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building To: [Contractor] This notice is to advise you: That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received by the OWNER. That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents. Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as required by the Agreement. Dated this day of , 20 . The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20_ and , 20__, respectively. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Title: ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of , 20__. CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] By: Title: SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum of ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year], a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins Project, 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the [Day] day of [Month] in the year of 20[Year], a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins Project, 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00630 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance in accordance with the following requirements: 1. The Contractor will provide, from insurance companies acceptable to the City, the insurance coverage designated hereinafter and pay all costs. Before commencing work under this bid, the Contractor shall furnish the City with certificates of insurance showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates and date of expiration of policies, and containing substantially the following statement: “The insurance evidenced by this Certificate will not reduce coverage or limits and will not be cancelled, except after thirty (30) days written notice has been received by the City of Fort Collins.” In case of the breach of any provision of the Insurance Requirements, the City, at its option, may take out and maintain, at the expense of the Contractor, such insurance as the City may deem proper and may deduct the cost of such insurance from any monies which may be due or become due the Contractor under this Agreement. The City, its officers, agents and employees shall be named as additional insureds on the Contractor’s general liability and automobile liability insurance policies for any claims arising out of work performed under this Agreement. 2. Insurance coverages shall be as follows: A. Workers' Compensation & Employer's Liability. The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Agreement for all of the Contractor's employees engaged in work performed under this agreement: 1. Workers' Compensation insurance with statutory limits as required by Colorado law. 2. Employer's Liability insurance with limits of $100,000 per accident, $500,000 disease aggregate, and $100,000 disease each employee. B. Commercial General & Vehicle Liability. The Contractor shall maintain during the life of this Agreement such commercial general liability and automobile liability insurance as will provide coverage for damage claims of personal injury, including accidental death, as well as for claims for property damage, which may arise directly or indirectly from the performance of work under this Agreement. Coverage for property damage shall be on a "broad form" basis. The amount of insurance for each coverage, Commercial General and Vehicle, shall not be less than $1,000,000 combined single limits for bodily injury and property damage. In the event any work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for any liability directly or indirectly arising out of the work performed under this Agreement by a subcontractor, which liability is not covered by the subcontractor's insurance SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER) DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE: 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado INCLUDE: OWNER: City of Fort Collins CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] CONTRACT DATE: [Date] The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or specified part of the project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on . The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below. CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By: OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE REMARKS: SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE , 20__ TO: [Contractor] Gentlemen: You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by [Contractor] for the City of Fort Collins project, 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building. A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated [Contract Date]. In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date:____________ _, 20__. Sincerely, OWNER: City of Fort Collins By: Title: ATTEST: Title: SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (CONTRACTOR) TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER) FROM: [Contractor] (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project. Signed this day of , 20__. CONTRACTOR: [CONTRACTOR] By: Title: ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF COLORADO ) )ss. COUNTY OF LARIMER ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20__, by . Witness my hand and official seal. Notary Public My Commission Expires: SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] PROJECT: 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building CONTRACT DATE: [Date] In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for . (Surety) on bond of hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of , 20____ . (Surety Company) By: ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact. SECTION 00670 APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Conditions of the Contract These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions: A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions. 4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work: N/A Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the report. B. 4.2.1.2.1 No drawing of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in Paragraph 4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, except the following: N/A SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8. The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the General Conditions listed below are as follows: 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 Coverage A - Statutory Limits Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000 5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the Owner. 5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). 5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). SC-8.10 OWNER’s Project Manager A. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8: 8.10. The OWNER will provide a Project Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders, and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager. 8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have the authority set forth in the OWNER's Capital Project Procedures Manual. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be required to make comprehensive or continuous inspections to check the progress or quality of the Work. The Project Manager shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions or programs in connection with the Work, or for any failure of the Contractor to comply with laws and regulation applicable to the performance or furnishing of the Work. Visits and observations made by the Project Manager shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to conduct comprehensive inspections of the Work, to furnish materials and perform acceptable Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall at all times have access to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for such access so the Project Manager may perform his or her functions under the Contract Documents. 8.10.3 One or more Resident Construction Inspector(s) (RCI) may be assigned to assist the Project Manager in providing observation of the Work, to determine whether or not the Work is proceeding according to the construction documents. CONTRACTOR will receive written notification from the OWNER of any RCI assignments. The RCI shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The RCI will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The RCI's dealings in matters pertaining to the on-site work will be to keep the Project Manager properly apprised about such matters. 8.10.4 Communications: All instructions, approvals, and decisions of the Project Manager shall be in writing. The CONTRACTOR may not rely on instructions, approvals, or decisions of the Project Manager until the same are reduced to writing. SC-12.3 Add the following language to the end of paragraph 12.3. Contractor will include in the project schedule zero (0) days lost due to abnormal weather conditions. SECTION 00900 ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment SECTION 00950 CHANGE ORDER NO. PROJECT TITLE: 8296 Downtown Restrooms - Oak Street Restroom Building CONTRACTOR: [Contractor] PROJECT NUMBER: 8296 DESCRIPTION: 1. Reason for change: 2. Description of Change: 3. Change in Contract Cost: 4. Change in Contract Time: ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ .00 TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER % TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT % ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ .00 (Assuming all change orders approved) ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Contractor's Representative ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Project Manager REVIEWED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Purchasing Agent over $60,000 cc: City Clerk Contractor Engineer Project File Architect Purchasing SECTION 00960 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ELECTRICAL ENGINEER STRUCTURAL ENGINEER MECHANICAL ENGINEER CIVIL ENGINEER CITY OF FORT COLLINS PO BOX 580 FT. COLLINS, CO 80522 Phone: 970‐221‐6805 fcgov.com ARCHITECT OWNER RB+B ARCHITECTS, INC. 315 E. MOUNTAIN AVE., SUITE 100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80524 Phone: 970.484.0117 www.rbbarchitects.com NORTHERN ENGINEERING 200 SOUTH COLLEGE AVE, SUITE 010 FORT COLLINS, CO 80524 Phone: 970‐221‐4158 Fax: www.northernengineering.com LARSEN STRUCTURAL DESIGN 19 OLD TOWN SQUARE, SUITE 238 FT. COLLINS, CO 80524 Phone: 970.568.3355 www.larsend.com FARNSWORTH GROUP, INC 1612 SPECHT POINT ROAD, SUITE 105 FT. COLLINS, CO 80525 Phone: 970.484.7477 www.f‐w.com APS, INC 7726 PARK RIDGE CIRCLE FT. COLLINS, CO 80528 Phone: 970.206.0629 www.apsinc.biz PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 www.rbbarchitects.com © 2014 ISSUED: CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 12-31.34 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 04/07/2016 SHEET INDEX A006 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 05, 06, 07 A007 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 07 A008 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 07 A009 SPECFICATIONS ‐ 08 A010 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 08 A011 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 09, 10 A012 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 10 ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:17:31 AM G100 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 01 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECTION 01 25 00 ‐ SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Comparable Products: Products proposed by Contractor, by a manufacturer named in the specification, for Basis‐Of‐Design product specifications. Comparable products must be demonstrated to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents through submittal process: to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in‐service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. Comparable product approved by Architect may be incorporated into the Work without Change Order or other contract change. B. Named Products: Items identified in the Contract Documents by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature. C. Substitutions: Changes to the Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor for products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS D. Substitution Requests: Submit requests for consideration in writing. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions, and the following: 1. State whether the proposed substitution is a Substitution for Cause or a Substitution for Convenience. 1) If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified and Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. 3. Samples shall be provided for substitution requests as requested by the Architect. 4. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 5. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. 6. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 7. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 8. Submittals shall be electronic, in PDF format, submitted via email or FTP site. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 3.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:17:32 AM G101 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 01 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 4.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing/Inspection Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non‐conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings, as required. 8. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of the Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. C. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. D. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. E. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to testing agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed F. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." G. Protect construction exposed by or for quality‐control service activities. H. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality‐control services. 4.3 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. ` SECTION 01 73 00 ‐ EXECUTION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ELEC ELEC E ELEC ELEC T T T T T T PROPOSED 6" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING TRANSFORMERS PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING BOLLARDS (TYP.) PROPOSED 6" VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER SAWCUT LINE PROPOSED 7" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED HANDICAP RAMP WITH WARNING DOMES (TYP.) SAWCUT LINE SAWCUT LINE MATCH INTO EXISTING AT NEAREST JOINT PROPOSED 6" VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED 1.5' WIDE SIDEWALK CHASE @ 2.0% GRADE WITH METAL WAFFLE PLATE (SEE DETAIL) PROPOSED 1.5' WIDE SIDEWALK CHASE @ 2.0% GRADE WITH METAL WAFFLE PLATE (SEE DETAIL) PROPOSED BOLLARD (SEE DETAIL) PROPOSED FLUSH CURB & GUTTER 5' FROM TBC TO TBC 21.3' 18.7' 12' 12' 24' FL TO FL 12' 1.5' 4.0' 10.1' 11.5' PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING CONCRETE MEDIAN PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING PARKING STALLS (TYP.) PROPOSED 6" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED HANDICAP RAMP WITH WARNING DOMES ELEC ELEC E ELEC ELEC 2.0% 2.0% 2.0% 2.0% 1.4% 2.0% 2.2% 1.5% 2.0% 2.0% 2.0% 2.1% 2.0% 2.0% 3.0% 2.1% 3.5% 2.1% 2.1% 1.3% 3.0% 3.9% 4.5% 3.2% 2.7% 1.8% 3.2% 4.6% 3.4% (1.0%) (2.2%) (4.1%) (4.3%) 85.18 FL 84.64 FL 85.10 FL 84.76 FL 84.47 FL 84.22 FL 84.07 FL 84.04 FL 83.96 FL 83.96 FL 84.11 FL STRUCTURAL GENERAL NOTES Project: Oak Street Restroom Larsen Structural Design Job Number: 2004 DESIGN LOADS: International Building Code; IBC 2012 Edition, except as noted Risk Category: Table 1604.5 II Standard Roofs: Ground Snow: Pg 30 psf (used for drifting calculations) Flat Roof Snow: Pf 30 psf (Min.) Snow Exposure Factor: Ce ASCE 7-10 Table 7-2 1.0 Snow importance Factor: Is ASCE 7-10 Table 1.5-1 1.0 Snow Thermal Factor: Ct ASCE 7-10 Table 7.3 1.0 Lateral: Wind ASCE 7-10 Directional Procedure 3 Second Gust Velocity V_ult = 129 mph (V_asd = 100 mph) Importance Factor: Iw ASCE 7-10 Table 1.5-1 1.0 Building Category Enclosed Internal Pressure Coefficient ASCE 7-10 Table 26.11-1 GCpi= ±0.18 Exposure B Seismic Importance Factor: Ie ASCE 7-10 Table 1.5-1 1.0 Spectral Response Acceleration Coefficient Short Period Ss 0.184 g SDS 0.197 g One Second S1 0.058 g SD1 0.093 g Soils Site Class D Design Category Table 1613.3.5(1) & (2) B Design Base Shear 5.9 kips Seismic Response Coefficient Cs 0.0981 Response Modification Coefficient R 2.0 (Ordinary Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls) Analysis Procedure Equivalent Lateral Force FOUNDATION DESIGN: No site specific soils study has been performed on this site. OWNER/BUILDER ACCEPTS ALL RISK FOR THIS DECISION. Geotechnical engineer shall verify soil conditions and types during excavation and prior to concrete placement. The construction schedule shall allow time for testing and analysis of soils and any time required to modify the foundation design accordingly. --Footings--- Design of footings is based on assumed values as follows, geotechnical engineer shall verify values: Maximum allowable bearing pressure: 1500 psf Minimum dead load pressure: 0 psf Bear footings on natural undistrubed soils or properly compacted structural fill as directed by the geotechnical engineer. Bottom of exterior footings to bear a minimum of 36" below final exterior grade for frost protection. The demolition and removal of all existing foundations on the site shall be performed prior to the installation of any new foundations. REINFORCED CONCRETE: Design is based on "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete"(ACI 318-11). Concrete work shall conform to "Standard Specifications for Structural Concrete” (ACI 301-10). Structural concrete shall have the following properties: Intended f’c, (psi) Maximum Entrained Cement Use 28 day Aggregate Air (±1.5%) Type Foundations 3,000 1 1/2” Stone 5% I/II Interior Slab- 3,500 ¾” Stone 3% I/II on-Grade Concrete mix designs shall be submitted to the engineer of record no less than 15 working days prior to the commencent of pouring. Water cement ratios shall in no case exceed 0.50. Slump of concrete shall be specified by the concrete sub- contractor to provide adequate workability and finishing of the concrete being placed. No concrete admixture containing calcium chloride shall be permitted in any concrete. Detailing, fabrication, and placement of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures (ACI 315-99). Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. Splice welded-wire fabric by lapping one full mesh space plus 2". S102 9 S102 S102 S102 8 6 7 3 S102 8" 1' - 4" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 3' - 4" 2' - 0" 3' - 4" 1' - 4" 8" 8" 7' - 4" 3' - 4" 9' - 4" 8" 8" 1' - 4" 3' - 4" 8' - 0" 3' - 4" 1' - 4" 8" 21' - 4" 18' - 8" 5 S103 20' - 0" 17' - 4" TYP. F24 F3.0 F24 F24 F3.0 F3.0 F24 F3.0 INTERIOR NON- BEARING CMU WALL, TYP. INTERIOR NON-BEARING WALLS SHALL NOT CONNECT TO EXTERIOR WALLS. PROVIDE JOINT BETWEEN INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR WALLS. CAULK PER ARCH. PLANS, TYPICAL 7 S103 10 S103 S103 11 1' - 0" 19' - 4" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" 1' - 0" TYP. OF (4) 1 A B 2 TYP. 1' - 0" 16' - 8" 1' - 0" 6 S103 4' - 4" 2' - 8" T/CMU SEE PLAN ROOF DECK PER PLAN HSS PER PLAN (LLH) 1/2" x 6" x 7" CAP PLATE w/ (2) 3/4"Ø ERECTION STUDS 1/4" COLUMN PER PLAN 2 S103 7" 8" ALIGN HSS CENTERLINE w/ COLUMN CENTERLINE AT BOTTOM OF HSS A TOP CMU BLOCK NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. RAKE BLOCK AT PITCH OF ROOF 108' - 0" B/PLATE #5 ADJACENT TO STEEL COLUMN, TYPICAL COLUMN PER PLAN 1/4" x 4" x 1'-11" PLATE, TYP. (2) 3/4"Ø x 6" HEADED ANCHOR STUDS ON TOP OF PLATE, TYP. 1/4 3" TYP. 1' - 11" 6 1/2" 7" 8" 1 1/2" A 2 CMU SHALL BE INSTALLED AROUND HSS COLUMN AND FULLY GROUTED 1 1/2"Ø HOLE. CONTINUE REINFORCING BAR THROUGH PLATE, TYP. HSS BEAM PER PLAN CJP 1/4 TYP. 4" / 12" 2" / 12" WORKPOINT AT INTERSECTION OF B/PWD. DECK PLANES. SEE FOR ADD'L INFO. TO B/HSS, TYP. 1 1/2" B/HSS 6" TO T/HSS 4 1/2" B/DECK 5 / S103 110' - 6 3/8" B/DECK = WORKPOINT RAFTER FRAMING NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY A1 A311 DRAWING NUMBER SHEET NUMBER SECTION MARK DRAWING NUMBER SHEET NUMBER A1 DETAIL MARK A531 DRAWING NUMBER SHEET NUMBER DETAIL CALLOUT OR ENLARGED PLAN A1 A501 A4 A211 A2 A1 A3 DRAWING NUMBER SHEET NUMBER INTERIOR ELEVATION MARK A211 A1 DRAWING NUMBER SHEET NUMBER EXTERIOR ELEVATION MARK DRAWING NUMBER VIEW SCALE DRAWING TITLE BRICK CMU CONCRETE ‐ POLISHED OR SEALED. RE: PLAN STEEL WOOD SHIM / BLOCKING WOOD ‐ CONTINUOUS PLYWOOD RIGID INSULATION SPRAY INSULATION EARTH GRAVEL BATT INSULATION GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00.A0 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD SPEC SECTION REFERENCE ORGANIZATIONAL PLACEHOLDER (USED IN DRAFTING SOFTWARE. NUMBER DOES NOT RELATE TO SPEC SECTION) ITEM DESCRIPTION B A C D F G H I L M ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:40 AM A002 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 02, 03 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECTION 02 41 16 ‐ STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off‐site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. Include fasteners or brackets needed for reattachment elsewhere. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Owner intends to salvage items from the site prior to structure demolition activities. Following permanent closure of buildings identified for demolition, and prior to start of demolition activities, provide not less than two weeks notice to Owner, for Owner removal of items of interest. 1. Items that the Owner intends to remove prior to structure demolition include, but are not limited to: a. Parking blocks (Undamaged). B. Following Owner removal of items of interest, all structures and materials indicated to be removed become demolition waste and are the property of the Contractor. C. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit informational report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, dust control and, noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. 1. Adjacent Buildings: Detail special measures proposed to protect adjacent buildings to remain including means of egress from those buildings. B. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Temporary interruption of utility services. 3. Shutoff and capping or re‐routing of utility services. C. Pre‐demolition Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before the Work begins. D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA‐approved certification program. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:40 AM A003 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐03 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 6.11 CONCRETE POLISHED FINISH A. Examination: 1. Following 14 day cure, examine substrate for conditions affecting performance of finish. Rectify conditions detrimental to timely and proper work. 2. Verify that base slab meets finish and surface profile requirements. 3. Prior to application, verify that floor surfaces are free of construction damage and contaminants. 4. Repair of defective concrete is the responsibility of this section. 5. Proceed with Work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Polishing: 1. Polish: Level 1: Matte finish, 100 grit 2. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs. a. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth. b. Apply reactive stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions. c. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats. d. Apply penetrating stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions. e. Continue polishing with progressively finer‐grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to match approved mockup. f. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations. g. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces. 6.12 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw‐cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 6.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. Do not patch, fill, touch‐up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. B. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. C. Patching Mortar: Mix dry‐pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2‐1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. D. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:41 AM A004 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 03, 04 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECTION 03 45 00 ‐ PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and water‐absorption tests. B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of each unit. Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish. Indicate details at building corners. Size precast coping units to accommodate building expansion joint and masonry control joint alignment ‐ see the Drawings. 1. Indicate separate face and backup mixture locations and thicknesses. 2. Include plans and elevations showing unit location and sequence of erection for special conditions. 3. Indicate location of each architectural precast concrete unit by same identification mark placed on unit. 4. Indicate relationship of architectural precast concrete units to adjacent materials. C. Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook ‐ Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated. C. Quality‐Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements, quality‐control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rocky Mountain Prestress, Inc., (303) 480‐1111. 2. Arco Precast. (303) 659‐2800. 3. Fort Collins Precast. (970) 484‐2112. 4. Colorado Precast (970) 669‐0535. 5. Reliance Precast. (303) 833‐4048. 6. Acceptable Substitution: See Section 01 60 00 ‐ Product Requirements. 2.2 MOLD MATERIALS A. Molds: Rigid, dimensionally stable, non‐absorptive material, warp and buckle free, that will provide continuous and true precast concrete surfaces within fabrication tolerances indicated; nonreactive with concrete and suitable for producing required finishes. 1. Mold‐Release Agent: Commercially produced liquid‐release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect precast concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface or joint treatments of precast concrete. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:42 AM A005 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 04, 05 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick and CMU as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. 1. When placing, remove excess mortar from the rear of the brick. Follow procedures that minimize the amount of loose mortar that falls into the cavity space. 2. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct‐applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated and at the following locations: 1. Where resilient base is scheduled. 2. Where ceramic or quarry tile is scheduled. 3. At CMU against which rigid insulation is applied. 4. At CMU to be dampproofed or waterproofed. 5. At CMU to which adhesive and plastic flashing will be applied. E. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks with compressible joint filler. Fill deck flutes full. Use rated joint filler at rated masonry walls. F. Isolate non‐bearing masonry partitions on concrete slabs on grade from bearing walls occurring on foundations. Keep joints clean for sealants. G. Coordinate locations of mechanical and electrical penetrations of masonry walls with those contractors. Form openings neatly with clearances to pipes and equipment that can be covered with standard escutcheons or trim. Build in sleeves supplied by others. Subsequent adjustments to sizes shall be made by masons using power equipment to provide straight, true edges. H. Coordinate locations of embedded conduit with Mechanical, Electrical, Security and Fire Alarm subcontractors for power, lights, fire alarm, HVAC control wiring, security and fire alarm wiring so as to not locate conduit in cavities of stud/veneer or masonry veneer walls. Minimize exposed conduit. I. Provide minimum sized cutouts for electrical boxes, thermostats and other devices so that device covers fully conceal the cutout. J. Install bracing to structure for interior masonry partitions extending above ceilings, but not to structure, at 4 feet o.c. minimum. K. Take special care working adjacent to built‐in items with aluminum surfaces. Minimize contact between mortar and aluminum. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T‐shaped units. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:43 AM A006 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 05, 06, 07 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot‐dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon‐steel hex‐headed bolts and carbon‐steel nuts; and flat, hardened‐steel washers; zinc coated by hot‐dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion‐resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC‐ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Power‐Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion‐resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC‐ ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion‐resistant‐coated, self‐drilling, self‐tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low‐profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [SSPC‐Paint 20 or MIL‐P‐21035B] [ASTM A 780]. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2‐1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage‐compensating agents, and plasticizing and water‐reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30‐minute working time. D. Shims: Load bearing, high‐density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold‐formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims. E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed‐cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold‐formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold‐formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold‐formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:44 AM A007 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 07 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECTION 07 54 23 ‐ THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing assembly shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing, flashings, and pre‐finished metal edge flashing shall remain watertight, and roofing assembly shall remain intact and fastened to the building structure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Performance Standards: FM Global, FM Approvals, and RoofNav. D. FM Approvals: Roofing design, components and assembly shall be based on the latest versions of FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1‐28, 1‐28R, 1‐29, 1‐34, and 1‐49. 1. Windstorm Resistance Classification: 1‐90. 2. Roof Zones: “Field,” “Perimeter” and “Corner” areas of the roof, as defined by FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1‐28 and 1‐29. a. Width for perimeter and corner zones shall be calculated according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheets 1‐28 and 1‐29 and rounded up to the next increment of 4 feet. b. Provide wider zones where required to satisfy local code or FM RoofNav. c. Minimum Design Requirements: 1) Fastening based on Field zone 1‐90 rating with FM prescriptive enhancements for fastening in perimeter and corner zones. 2) Design to more stringent loading where required by local code or FM RoofNav. 3. Provide a complete roofing assembly, including membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials, that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings. 4. Complete roofing assembly shall be listed by FM Approvals with a full‐system assembly number. 5. Hail Resistance: SH. E. UL Class A fire rating. F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC‐1. G. Insulation Thermal Value (R), minimum: R‐30 per 2014 LTTR values. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Details at all edges and terminations, expansion joints, penetrations, flashings, etc. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field‐of‐roof locations. 4. Roof plan confirming positive drainage. 5. Submitting Architect’s details as shop drawings is not acceptable. Details must be project‐specific, apply to conditions that occur on this project, and describe all details that the Contractor intends to ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:45 AM A008 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 07 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. I. Apply sealant prior to masonry having sealer applied. J. Install sealant in joints between sidewalks and foundation walls, joints between curbs and sidewalks and open joints between sidewalk sections. K. Press clean, dry sand into sealant surface prior to curing in joints in masonry walls, including joints adjacent to windows, doors and other metal framing. L. Sealant not fully adhered to joint surfaces and not neat and workmanlike in appearance will be rejected. Rejected work shall be removed and joints thoroughly cleaned prior to installing new sealant. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field‐Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.7 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Materials Color Shall Match Remark B. Painted CMU to CMU Paint Color ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:46 AM A009 12‐31.34 SPECFICATIONS ‐ 08 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECTION 08 11 19 STAINLESS‐STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for stainless‐steel frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content and cost. C. Shop Drawings: For stainless‐steel hollow‐metal work. 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. D. Samples: 1. Finishes: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5 inches. 2. Doors: Include section of vertical‐edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. 3. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow‐metal panels and glazing if applicable. E. Product Schedule: For stainless‐steel, hollow‐metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For assemblies required to be fire rated performed by a qualified testing agency. B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project‐site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. B. Shipping Spreaders: Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded or mechanically attached to jambs and mullions. C. Store doors and frames under cover at Project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4‐inch‐high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4‐inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:46 AM A010 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 08 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECCTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross‐referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following: 1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer‐installed and field‐installed wiring. Include the following: a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings. D. Keying Schedule: Prepared under the supervision of the Owner, separate schedule detailing final keying instructions for locksets and cylinders in writing. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner to approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include "as built" modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance. F. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:47 AM A011 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 09, 10 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECTION 09 91 13 PAINTING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. 5. Samples: Submit two paper "drop" samples, 8‐1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of colors, stains and textures available for each finishing product specified. Refer to Sections 062000 for wood species to submit. Remake samples until acceptable to Architect. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross‐reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. E. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect. Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not to be painted, such as masonry, have been approved. F. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch‐up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces. 1.2 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 2 gal. (7.6 L) of each material and color applied. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 5. Paint mason's block sample wall at time of its construction to establish acceptance quality of filling and finish coats. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:48 AM A012 12‐31.34 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 10 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public‐use washroom accessories. 2. Custodial accessories. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 1. Approved full‐size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031‐inch (0.8‐mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper‐and‐theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. C. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). D. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile‐butadiene‐styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC‐USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES FD FD FD FD FD FD ROOM TAG DOOR MARK WINDOW MARK WALL TYPE MARK ACCESSORIES MARK SHEET KEYNOTE STRUCTURAL GRID A30ra Room Name 101 M8 W10 1. A.0 101A A201 B2 A201 A1 C3 A301 C3 A301 C1 A301 C1 A301 A201 B1 A201 A2 4'‐8" 3'‐4" 3'‐4" 10'‐0" 21'‐4" 2'‐0" 3'‐4" 8'‐0" 3'‐4" 2'‐0" 1'‐0 3/8" 11 5/8" 3'‐4" 2'‐8" 3'‐4" 2'‐0" 3'‐4" 1'‐0" 1'‐0" 8'‐4" A561 C3 A110 A109 A111 A112 A113 A114 A1 A221 6'‐8" 5'‐4" 9'‐4" TOILET 5 A110 TOILET 4 A109 LEVEL 1 100'‐0" C3 A301 T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" A201 A4 B A 04 20 00.A1 FACING BRICK‐1 04 20 00.A2 FACING BRICK‐2 CJ PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL PT‐3 07 62 00.B3 GRAVEL STOP 4 OD X .120 WALL ROUND STEEL TUBE DOWNSPOUT ‐ PAINT 2" / 12" C2 A561 W2 A3 A561 A201 C3 10 14 00.A2 FLAT SIGN TYPE C CUT METAL PANEL SIGN A2 03 45 00.A1 A301 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL KNOX BOX B4 A561 EXHAUST AIR DISCHARGE ‐ RE: MECH LEVEL 1 100'‐0" T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" 10 14 00.A2 FLAT SIGN 1 2 04 20 00.A2 FACING BRICK‐2 04 20 00.A1 FACING BRICK‐1 CJ W1 PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL PT‐3 07 62 00.B3 GRAVEL STOP A201 C2 (3) TYPE B FD FD FD 04 20 00.B0 CMU PT‐1 PT‐1, COLUMNS TYPICAL 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW A1 A221 04 20 00.B0 CMU PT‐1 10 28 00.A2 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER PT‐2 STAINLESS STEEL TOP & STRAP 10 28 00.C1 GRAB BAR GRILLE ‐ RE: MECH 04 20 00.B0 CMU 4'‐0" A201 C4 PT‐2 PT‐1 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE 4'‐0" 2'‐0" 04 20 00.B0 CMU PT‐1 10 28 00.B5 HAND DRYER REMOVABLE STAINLESS STEEL PIPE PROTECTION PT‐2 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW 10 28 00.A6 SOAP DISPENSER GRILLE ‐ RE: MECH 04 20 00.B0 CMU REMOVABLE STAINLESS STEEL PIPE PROTECTION 4'‐0" PT‐2 PT‐1 A201 C4 SIM 04 20 00.B0 CMU PT‐1 PT‐2 04 20 00.B0 CMU PT‐1 LEVEL 1 100'‐0" C1 A301 C1 A301 A561 C4 A1 A221 XB A301 A1 A561 A2 1 2 A561 A1 7'‐4" VARIES R1 XB ELECTRICAL PANEL 4'‐0" LEVEL 1 100'‐0" C3 A301 C3 A301 T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" A301 A3 A301 A4 A301 A2 A301 B2 C1 A561 A B 1 11/16" C2 A561 XB XB R1 110'‐08" 109'‐10" T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" A10 A30 R1 EQ EQ RADIANT PANEL HEATER & 2" VANDAL RESISTANT COVER 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT TYPE: 2 SEE SCHEDULE 4" 2" SCHEDULE SEE 2" TYPE: F A 08 11 13.A9 STAINLESS STEEL DOOR AND FRAME 04 20 00.B0 CMU 07 21 00.B7 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION 07 92 00.A5 SEALANT, BOTH SIDES 07 62 00.A9 FLEXIBLE FLASHINGWRAP BLOCKING AND CONTINUE BEHIND SPRAY FOAM INSULATION 06 10 00.B4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING 05 40 00.C1 LIGHT GAUGE ANGLE 2‐1/2" X 2‐1/2" X 12 GA 2" L 2'‐0" O.C. MAX SPACING 2" 1'‐0 3/4" 08 11 13.A2 JAMB ANCHOR GROUT FILLED FRAME 1 3/4" VIF 16'‐1 3/8" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 3'‐6 15/16" ALIGN MULLIONS W/ WALLS RE:C4/A561 4 1/2" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 4'‐5" VIF 16'‐5" 1 3/4" 4 1/2" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 3'‐5" ALIGN MULLIONS W/ WALLS RE: C4/A561 4 1/2" 1 3/4" 1 3/4" 5'‐9 3/4" 2 3 1/4" 1'‐0 3/4" 08 11 13.A9 STAINLESS STEEL DOOR AND FRAME 04 20 00.B0 CMU 07 21 00.B7 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION Plumbing General Notes WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED BY A LICENSED PLUMBER OF THE STATE OF COLORADO. MATERIALS, INSTALLATION AND TESTING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ADOPTED EDITION OF STATE ANDLOCAL CODE PROCEDURES, METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS, INCLUDING THE MOST STRINGENT OF HEALTH AND SAFETY STANDARDS AS REQUIRED AND AS INTERPRETED BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. MINIMUM CODE AND STANDARDS REQUIRED, BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: "INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE" (2012 EDITION) "NFPA 54 - NATIONAL FUEL GAS CODE" APPLICABLE LOCAL AND MUNICIPAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. MEANING AND INTENT OF DRAWINGS: DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. PIPING IS SHOWN IN SCHEMATIC FORM. SCALES INDICATED ARE FOR ARCHITECTURAL REFERENCE ONLY. IT IS NOT INTENDED THAT THE DRAWINGS SHOW EVERY WASTE, VENT, WATER PIPE, FITTING, SUPPORTS, ETC., AND IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT THE DRAWINGS MUST BE FOLLOWED AS CLOSELY AS CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PERMIT, THE PROPER INSTALLATION ACCORDING TO THE TRUE INTENT AND MEANING OF THE DRAWINGS, LOCAL CODES AND STANDARD PRACTICES SHALL BE PROVIDED. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. REPORT ANY PROBLEMS OR CONFLICTS TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER. NOTED DIMENSIONS TAKE PRECEDENCE OVER SCALED DIMENSIONS. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. ANY MINOR CHANGES IN LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, WASTE VENT, WATER PIPE, ETC., FROM THOSE LOCATIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, SHALL BE MADE WITHOUT EXTRA COST, IF SO DIRECTED BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER BEFORE THE INSTALLATION IS MADE. A MINOR CHANGE IN LOCATION IS CONSIDERED TO BE WITHIN 5'-0" OF THE ORIGINAL INDICATED LOCATION. THE EQUIPMENT INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS INCLUDE ONLY THE MAJOR EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS. NOT WITHSTANDING, THE DETAILS PRESENTED IN THESE DRAWINGS VERIFY THE COMPLETENESS OF THE MATERIALS LISTS AND SUITABILITY OF DEVICES TO MEET THE INTENT OF THIS PROJECT. ANY ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT OR MATERIAL REQUIRED, EVEN IF NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED HEREIN SHALL BE PROVIDED WITHOUT CLAIM FOR ADDITIONAL PAYMENT; IT BEING UNDERSTOOD THAT A COMPLETE AND OPERATIONAL PLUMBING SYSTEM, SATISFACTORY TO THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND THE OWNER SHALL BE PROVIDED. USE ONLY THE MANUFACTURER'S TESTED ASSEMBLIES. ALL GENERAL NOTES ARE PART OF THIS CONTRACT. ALL EXPENSES CARRIED BY THE ARCHITECT/ENGINEER IN TROUBLESHOOTING SYSTEM(S) PROBLEMS CAUSED BY INADEQUATE WORKMANSHIP, LACK OF TECHNICAL EXPERTISE OR OTHER FORMS OF POOR PERFORMANCE ON THE PART OF A CONTRACTOR, SHALL BE BORN BY THAT CONTRACTOR. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SERVICES IN BUILDING AND TO 5'-0" BEYOND THE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION LINE. SITE UTILITY CONTRACTOR IS FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD FD ADA 1 A109 ADA-2 A110 CHASE A111 TOILET 1 A112 TOILET 3 A114 TOILET 2 A113 A1 75 6x6 (TYP.) B1 75 6x6 (TYP.) ERV 1 4 MP1.1 10"ø (TYP.) 1 (TYP.) 2 (TYP.) 3 T EA (BOTTOM) OA (TOP) EA 10" Ø 6 RP 2 (TYP. 5) 7 8 6x6 8 10"ø 4 5 T 7 T 7 9 1 (TYP.) RP 1 (TYP. 2) ADA 1 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE PLAN MARK FIXTURE DESCRIPTION AND REMARKS MINIMUM INDIVIDUAL LINE SIZES COLD WATER HOT WATER WASTE VENT ELEC WC-1 WATER CLOSET- WALL MOUNTED, WALL OUTLET, STAINLESS STEEL, FLUSH VALVE WITH ELONGATED BOWL, SIPHON JET, INTEGRAL TRAP. WATER CLOSET SHALL FLUSH ON 1.28GAL OF WATER OR LESS. LEVER HANDEL FLUSH VAVLE. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: ACORN (1680) FLUSH VALVE: CONCEALED, SENSOR ACTIVATED, MECHANICAL OVERRIDE BUTTON, WITH 24V TRANSFORMER. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: SLOAN, MODEL 152 ES-S TMO SWB ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE WITH HINDGED SEAT (ACORN) AND TRANSFORMER (SLOAN EL-154). 1-1/2" N/A 3" 2" 24V WC-2 WATER CLOSET, ADA- WALL MOUNTED, WALL OUTLET, STAINLESS STEEL, FLUSH VALVE WITH ELONGATED BOWL, SIPHON JET, INTEGRAL TRAP. WATER CLOSET SHALL FLUSH ON 1.28GAL OF WATER OR LESS. PROVIDE WITH ADA, LEVER HANDEL FLUSH VAVLE. MOUNT RIM 16 1/8 INCHES AFF. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: ACORN (1680) FLUSH VALVE: CONCEALED, SENSOR ACTIVATED, MECHANICAL OVERRIDE BUTTON, WITH 24V TRANSFORMER. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: SLOAN, MODEL 152 ES-S TMO SWB ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE WITH HINDGED SEAT (ACORN) AND TRANSFORMER (SLOAN EL-154). 1-1/2" N/A 3" 2" 24V L-1 LAVATORY- WALL MOUNTED, 14 GAGE TYPE 304 STAINLESS STEEL, 18 INCH x 18 INCH MINIMUM AND 4-1/2 INCH DEEP, RECTANGULAR BOWL. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: ACORN (1652LRB-1). ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE WITH DECK MOUNTED FAUCET, 24V METERING HOT/COLD VALVES, AND P-TRAP BEHIND WALL. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: ACORN ( MVC - TIME-TROL - HOT AND COLD). 1/2" 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" N/A MSB-1 MOP SERVICE BASIN- FLOOR MOUNTED, MOLDED STONE 24 INCH x 24 INCH x 10 INCH DEEP. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: FLORESTONE (MSR-2424). MOP SERVICE BASIN TRIM: CHROME PLATED CAST BRASS VACUUM BREAKER SPOUT, 3/4 INCH HOSE THREADED OUTLET, WITH PAIL HOOK WITH WALL SUPPORT. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: DELTA (28T9) ACCESSORIES: DOME STRAINER, 3 INCH CL TRAP. PROVIDE WITH 5 FEET OF 1/2 INCH PLAIN END REINFORCED RUBBER HOSE, AND HOSE CLAMP. 1/2" 1/2" 3" N/A N/A BFP-1 BACKFLOW PREVENTER- REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTER. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: WATTS (LF909M1) 2" N/A N/A N/A N/A TMV-1 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE- WATTS, MODEL LFUSG-B-SC. LEAD FREE, SATIN CHROME FINISH. PROVIDE REDUCERS AT ALL MIXING VALVE CONNECTIONS FOR 1/2". SET DISCHARGE AT 105°F, ADJUSTABLE. 3/8" 3/8" N/A N/A N/A WH-1 WALL HYDRANT - CONCEALED FREEZEPROOF WALL HYDRANT BY WOODFORD, MODEL MB67-K. PROVIDE WITH KEYED LOCK, HOSE CONNECTION AND BACKFLOW PREVENTER. 3/4" N/A N/A N/A N/A - PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 03/04/16 NO DESCRIPTION DATE APS, INC. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS APS..544-15 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS MARCH 4, 2016 E0 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWING INDEX FD FD FD FD FD FD A110 A109 A125 A112 A113 A114 TOILET 5 A110 TOILET 4 A109 CHASE A111 TOILET 1 A112 TOILET 2 A113 TOILET 3 A114 1 2 TYP 1 2 4" / 12" 2" / 12" B A B A 1 2 4" / 12" 2" / 12" - PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 03/04/16 NO DESCRIPTION DATE APS, INC. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS APS..544-15 OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE March 16, 2016 Dust Prevention and Control Manual Page i CONTENTS 1.0 Introduction 1 1.1 Title 1 1.2 Purpose of Manual 1 1.3 Applicability 1 1.4 Definitions 2 2.0 Fugitive Dust and the Problems it Causes 5 2.1 What is Fugitive Dust, Generally? 5 2.2 Why is the City Addressing Fugitive Dust? 5 2.3 Health and Environmental Effects 6 2.4 Nuisance and Aesthetics 6 2.5 Safety Hazard and Visibility 6 3.0 Best Management Practices 7 3.1 Earthmoving Activities 8 3.2 Demolition and Renovation 10 3.3 Stockpiles 12 3.4 Street Sweeping 14 3.5 Track‐out / Carry‐out 15 3.6 Bulk Materials Transport 16 3.7 Unpaved Roads and Haul Roads 18 3.8 Parking Lots 20 3.9 Open Areas and Vacant Lots 22 3.10 Saw Cutting and Grinding 24 3.11 Abrasive Blasting 26 3.12 Mechanical Blowing 28 4.0 Dust Control Plan for Land Development Greater Than Five Acres 30 5.0 Resources 34 5.1 Cross Reference to Codes, Standards, Regulations, and Policies 34 5.2 City of Fort Collins Manuals and Policies 37 5.3 References for Dust Control 37 Page 1 1.0 Introduction 1.1 Title The contents of this document shall be known as the Dust Prevention and Control Manual (“the Manual”). 1.2 Purpose of Manual The purpose of the Manual is to establish minimum requirements consistent with nationally recognized best management practices for controlling fugitive dust emissions and to describe applicable best management practices to prevent, minimize, and mitigate off‐property transport or off‐vehicle transport of fugitive dust emissions for specific dust generating activities and sources. 1.3 Applicability This Manual applies to any person who conducts, or is an owner or operator of, a dust generating activity or source, as described in this Manual, within the City of Fort Collins. Page 2 1.4 Definitions Abrasive blasting shall mean a process to smooth rough surfaces; roughen smooth surfaces; and remove paint, dirt, grease, and other coatings from surfaces. Abrasive blasting media may consist of sand; glass, plastic or metal beads; aluminum oxide; corn cobs; or other materials. Additional best management practice shall mean using at least one additional measure if the required best management practices are ineffective at preventing off‐property transport of particulate matter. Additional requirements shall mean when applicable, any measure that is required, e.g., a dust control plan when project sites are over 5 acres in size. Best management practice shall mean any action or process that is used to prevent or mitigate the emission of fugitive dust into the air. Bulk materials transport shall mean the carrying, moving, or conveying of loose materials including, but not limited to, earth, rock, silt, sediment, sand, gravel, soil, fill, aggregate, dirt, mud, construction or demolition debris, and other organic or inorganic material containing particulate matter onto a public road or right‐of‐way in an unenclosed trailer, truck bed, bin, or other container. Chemical stabilization shall mean the application of chemicals used to bind soil particles or increase soil moisture content, including, but not limited to, dust suppressants, palliatives, tackifiers, surfactants, and soil stabilizers. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐ based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. Code shall mean the Fort Collins City Code, as amended from time to time. Dust control measure shall mean any action or process that is used to prevent or mitigate the emission of fugitive dust into the air, including but not limited to the best management practices identified in this Manual. Dust generating activity or source shall mean a process, operation, action, or land use that creates emissions of fugitive dust or causes Page 3 Local wind speed shall mean the current or forecasted wind speed for the Fort Collins area as measured at the surface weather observation station KFNL located at the Fort Collins Loveland Municipal Airport or at Colorado State University’s Fort Collins or Christman Field weather stations or as measured onsite with a portable or hand‐held anemometer. The City will use anemometers whenever practicable. Maximum speed limit shall mean the speed limit on public rights‐of‐way adopted by the City pursuant to Fort Collins Traffic Code adopted pursuant to City Code Section 28‐16 For private roadways, a speed limit shall be established as appropriate to minimize off‐site transportation of. Mechanical blower shall mean any portable machine powered with an internal combustion or electric‐powered engine used to blow leaves, clippings, dirt or other debris off sidewalks, driveways, lawns, medians, and other surfaces including, but not limited to, hand‐held, back‐ pack and walk‐behind units, as well as blower‐ vacuum units. Off‐property transport shall mean the visible emission of fugitive dust beyond the property line of the property on which the emission originates or the project boundary when the emission originates in the public right‐of‐way or on public property. Off‐vehicle transport shall mean the visible emission of fugitive dust from a vehicle that is transporting dust generating materials on a public road or right‐of‐way. On‐tool local exhaust ventilation shall mean a vacuum dust collection system attached to a construction tool that includes a dust collector (hood or shroud), tubing, vacuum, and a high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter. On‐tool wet dust suppression shall mean the operation of nozzles or sprayers attached to a construction tool that continuously apply water or other liquid to the grinding or cutting area by a pressurized container or other water source. Open area shall mean any area of undeveloped land greater than one‐half acre that contains less than 70 percent vegetation. This includes undeveloped lots, vacant or idle lots, natural areas, parks, or other non‐agricultural areas. Recreational and multi‐use trails maintained by the City are not included as an open area. Operator or owner shall mean any person who has control over a dust generating source either by operating, supervising, controlling, or maintaining ownership of the activity or source including, but not limited to, a contractor, lessee, or other responsible party of an activity, operation, or land use that is a dust generating Page 4 Stockpile shall mean any accumulation of bulk materials that contain particulate matter being stored for future use or disposal. This includes backfill materials and storage piles for soil, sand, dirt, mulch, aggregate, straw, chaff, or other materials that produce dust. Storm drainage facility shall mean those improvements designed, constructed or used to convey or control stormwater runoff and to remove pollutants from stormwater runoff after precipitation. Surface roughening shall mean to modify the soil surface to resist wind action and reduce dust emissions from wind erosion by creating grooves, depressions, ridges or furrows perpendicular to the predominant wind direction using tilling, ripping, discing, or other method. Synthetic or natural cover shall mean the installation of a temporary cover material on top of disturbed soil surfaces or stockpiles, such as tarps, plastic sheeting, netting, mulch, wood chips, gravel or other materials capable of preventing wind erosion. Track‐out shall mean the carrying of mud, dirt, soil, or debris on vehicle wheels, sides, or undercarriages from a private, commercial, or industrial site onto a public road or right‐of‐ way. Vegetation shall mean the planting or seeding of appropriate grasses, plants, bushes, or trees to hold soil or to create a wind break. All seeded areas must be mulched, and the mulch should be adequately crimped and or tackified. If hydro‐seeding is conducted, mulching must be conducted as a separate, second operation. All planted areas must be mulched within twenty‐ four (24) hours after planting. Wet suppression shall mean the application of water by spraying, sprinkling, or misting to maintain optimal moisture content or to form a crust in dust generating materials and applied at a rate that prevents runoff from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility or watercourse. Wind barrier shall mean an obstruction at least five feet high erected to assist in preventing the blowing of fugitive dust, comprised of a solid board fence, chain link and fabric fence, vertical wooden slats, hay bales, earth berm, bushes, trees, or other materials installed perpendicular to the predominant wind direction or upwind of an adjacent residential, commercial, industrial, or sensitive area that would be negatively impacted by fugitive dust. Page 5 2.0 Fugitive Dust and the Problems it Causes 2.1 What is Fugitive Dust, Generally? Dust, also known as particulate matter, is made up of solid particles in the air that consist primarily of dirt and soil but can also contain ash, soot, salts, pollen, heavy metals, asbestos, pesticides, and other materials. “Fugitive” dust means particulate matter that has become airborne by wind or human activities and has not been emitted from a stack, chimney, or vent. The Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) estimates that more than 4,300 tons of particulate matter are emitted into the air in Larimer County annually. The primary sources of this particulate matter include construction activities, paved and unpaved roads, and agricultural operations. The quantity of dust emitted from a particular activity or area and the materials in it can depend on the soil type (sand, clay, silt), moisture content (dry or damp), local wind speed, and the current or past uses of the site (industrial, farming, construction). 2.2 Why is the City Addressing Fugitive Dust? Colorado state air regulations and Larimer County air quality standards generally require owners and operators of dust generating activities or sources to use all available and practical methods that are technologically feasible and economically reasonable in order to prevent fugitive dust emissions. However, state regulations and permitting requirements typically apply to larger stationary sources rather than to activities that generate dust. Larimer County fugitive dust standards apply only to land development. Although state and county requirements apply to many construction activities, they do not address many sources of dust emissions. Fort Collins is experiencing rapid growth and development that has contributed to local man‐made dust emissions. Page 6 2.3 Health and Environmental Effects Dust particles are very small and can be easily inhaled. They can enter the respiratory system and increase susceptibility to respiratory infections, and aggravate cardio‐pulmonary disease. Even short‐term exposure to dust can cause wheezing, asthma attacks and allergic reactions, and may cause increases in hospital admissions and emergency department visits for heart and lung related diseases. Fugitive dust emissions can cause significant environmental impacts as well as health effects. When dust from wind erosion or human activity deposits out of the air, it may impact vegetation, adversely affect nearby soils and waterways, and cause damage to cultural resources. Wind erosion can result in the loss of valuable top soil, reduce crop yields, and stunt plant growth. According to the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), studies have linked particulate matter exposure to health problems and environmental impacts such as: •Health Impacts: o Irritation of the airways, coughing, and difficulty breathing o Reduced lung function and lung cancer o Aggravated asthma and chronic bronchitis o Irregular heartbeat and increases in heart attacks •Environmental Impacts: o Haze and reduced visibility o Reduced levels of nutrients in soil 2.4 Nuisance and Aesthetics Dust, dirt and debris that become airborne eventually settle back down to the surface. How far it travels and where it gets deposited depends on the size and type of the particles as well as wind speed and direction. When this material settles, it can be deposited on homes, cars, lawns, pools and ponds, and other property. The small particles can get trapped in machinery and electronics causing abrasion, corrosion, and malfunctions. The deposited dust can damage painted surfaces, clog filtration systems, stain materials and cause other expensive clean‐up projects. 2.5 Safety Hazard and Visibility Blowing dust can be a safety hazard at construction sites and on roads and highways. Dust can obstruct visibility and can cause accidents between vehicles and bikes, pedestrians, or site workers. Dust plumes can also decrease visibility across a natural area or scenic vistas. The “brown cloud”, often visible along the Front Range during the winter months, and the brilliant red sunsets that occur are often caused by particulate matter and other pollutants in the air. Page 7 3.0 Best Management Practices This Manual describes established best management practices for controlling dust emissions that are practical and used in common practice to prevent or mitigate impacts to air quality from dust generating activities and sources occurring within Fort Collins. The objective of the dust control measures included in this Manual are to reduce dust emissions from human activities and to prevent those emissions from impacting others and are based on the following principles: Prevent – avoid creating dust emissions through good project planning and modifying or replacing dust generating activities. Minimize – reduce dust emissions with methods that capture, collect, or contain emissions. Mitigate – when preventing fugitive dust or minimizing the impacts are not feasible, the Manual provides specific measures to mitigate dust. More specifically, the Manual establishes the following procedures for each dust generating activity outlined in this Chapter: 1. Required Best Management Practices – this section includes the specific measures that are required to be implemented if the dust generating activity is occurring. For example, high wind restrictions (temporarily halting work when wind speeds exceed 30 mph) are required best management practices for earthmoving, demolition/renovation, saw cutting or grind, abrasive blasting, and leaf blowing. 2. Additional Best Management Practices – this section includes additional measures if the required best management practices are ineffective at preventing off‐property transport of particulate matter. At least one of the additional best management practices outlined in the Manual must be implemented on the site to be in compliance with the Manual. 3. Additional Requirements – When applicable, additional measures are also required, e.g., a dust control plan when project sites are over 5 acres in size. Page 8 3.1 Earthmoving Activities Above: This figure illustrates earthmoving, which is an activity that can generate dust. Dust emissions from earthmoving activities depend on the type and extent of activity being conducted, the amount of exposed surface area, wind conditions, and soil type and moisture content, including:  Site preparation (clearing, grubbing, scraping)  Road construction  Grading and overlot grading  Excavating, trenching, backfilling and compacting  Loading and unloading dirt, soil, gravel, or other earth materials  Dumping of dirt, soil, gravel, or other earth materials into trucks, piles, or receptacles  Screening of dirt, soil, gravel, or other earth materials Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any person, owner, or operator who conducts earthmoving that is a dust generating activity or source shall implement the following best management practices to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Minimize disturbed area: plan the project or activity so that the minimum amount of disturbed soil or surface area is exposed to wind or vehicle traffic at any one time. (ii) Reduce vehicle speeds: establish a maximum speed limit or install traffic calming devices to reduce speeds to a rate to mitigate off‐property transport of dust entrained by vehicles. (iii) Minimize drop height: Drivers and operators shall unload truck beds and loader or excavator buckets slowly, and minimize drop height of materials to the lowest height possible, including screening operations. (iv) High winds restriction: temporarily halt work activities during high wind events greater than 30 mph if operations would result in off‐property transport. (v) Restrict access: restrict access to the work area to only authorized vehicles and personnel. Page 9 (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.1(a)(i)‐(v) are ineffective to prevent off‐ property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Wet suppression: apply water to disturbed soil surfaces, backfill materials, screenings, and other dust generating operations as necessary and appropriate considering current weather conditions, and prevent water used for dust control from entering any public right‐of‐way, stormwater drainage facility, or watercourse. (ii) Wind barrier: construct a fence or other type of wind barrier to prevent wind erosion of top soils. (iii) Vegetation: plant vegetation appropriate for retaining soils or creating a wind break. (iv) Surface roughening: stabilize an active construction area during periods of inactivity or when vegetation cannot be immediately established. (v) Synthetic or natural cover: install cover materials during periods of inactivity and properly anchor the cover. (vi) Soil retention: stabilize disturbed or exposed soil surface areas that will be inactive for more than 30 days or while vegetation is being established. (vii) Chemical stabilization: apply chemical stabilizers using manufacturer’s recommended application rates. Avoid over‐application and prevent runoff of chemical stabilizers into any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. (c) Additional requirements: Any person, owner, or operator who conducts earthmoving that is a dust generating activity or source at a construction site or land development project with a total disturbed surface area equal to or greater than five (5) acres also shall implement the following measures: (i) Dust Control Plan: submit a plan that describes all potential sources of fugitive dust and methods that will be employed to control dust emissions with the development construction permit application or development review application (see Chapter 4 of this Manual). A copy of the Dust Control Plan must be onsite at all times and one copy must be provided to all contractors and operators engaged in dust generating activities at the site. (ii) Construction sequencing: include sequencing or phasing in the project plan to minimize the amount of disturbed area at any one time. Sites with greater than 25 acres of disturbed surface exposed at any one time may be asked to provide additional justification, revise the sequencing plan, or include additional best management practices. Page 10 3.2 Demolition and Renovation Above: This photo illustrates restricting access (a mandatory measure) and a wind barrier (an engineering control) for demolition and renovation activities. Dust generated from demolition activities may contain significant levels of silica, lead, asbestos, and particulate matter. Inhalation of silica and asbestos is known to cause lung cancer, and exposure to even small quantities of lead dust can result in harm to children and the unborn. In addition to complying with the dust control measures below, any person engaged in demolition or renovation projects must comply with applicable state and federal regulations for asbestos and lead containing materials and notification and inspection requirements under the State of Colorado Air Quality Control Commission's Regulation No. 8, Part B Control of Hazardous Air pollutants. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any person, owner, or operator who conducts demolition or renovation that is a dust generating activity or source shall implement the following best management practices to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Asbestos and lead containing materials: demolition and renovation activities that involve asbestos or lead containing materials must be conducted in accordance with Code Chapter 5 Sec. 5‐27 (59) §3602.1.1; (ii) Restrict access: restrict access to the demolition area to only authorized vehicles and personnel; (iii) High winds restriction: temporarily halt work activities during high wind events greater than 30 mph if operations would result in off‐property transport; and (iv) Minimize drop height: Drivers and operators shall unload truck beds and loader or excavator buckets slowly, and minimize drop height of materials to the lowest height possible, including screening operations. Page 11 (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.2(a)(i)‐(iv) are ineffective to prevent off‐ property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Wet suppression: apply water to demolished materials or pre‐wet materials to be demolished as necessary. Prevent water used for dust control from entering any public right‐of‐ way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (ii) Chemical stabilization: apply chemical stabilizers to demolished materials or materials to be demolished using manufacturer’s recommended application rates. Avoid over‐application and prevent runoff of chemical stabilizers into any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. (iii) Wind barrier: construct a fence or other type of wind barrier to prevent onsite dust generating materials from blowing offsite. (c) Additional requirements: (i) Building permit compliance: comply with all conditions and requirements under any building required pursuant to the Code and/or the Land Use Code. Above: This photo illustrates reducing drop height, a required best management practice. Page 12 3.3 Stockpiles Above: This photo illustrates wet suppression, an additional best management practicefor stockpiles. Stockpiles are used for both temporary and long‐term storage of soil, fill dirt, sand, aggregate, woodchips, mulch, asphalt and other industrial feedstock, construction and landscaping materials. Fugitive dust can be emitted from stockpiles while working the active face of the pile or when wind blows across the pile. The quantity of emissions depends on pile height and exposure to wind, moisture content and particle size of the pile material, surface roughness of the pile, and frequency of pile disturbance. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any owner or operator of a stockpile that is a dust generating activity or source shall implement the following best management practices to prevent off property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Minimize drop height: Drivers and operators shall unload truck beds and loader or excavator buckets slowly, and minimize drop height of materials to the lowest height possible, including screening operations. (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.3(a)(i) is ineffective to prevent off‐property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Wet suppression: Apply water to the active face when working the pile or to the entire pile during periods of inactivity. Prevent water used for dust control from entering any public right‐ of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (ii) Synthetic or natural cover: install cover materials during periods of inactivity and anchor the cover. Page 13 (iii) Surface roughening: stabilize a stockpile during periods of inactivity or when vegetation cannot be immediately established. (iv) Stockpile location: locate stockpile at a distance equal to ten times the pile height from property boundaries that abut residential areas. (v) Vegetation: seed and mulch any stockpile that will remain inactive for 30 days or more. (vi) Chemical stabilization: apply chemical stabilizers using manufacturer’s recommended application rates. Avoid over‐application and prevent runoff of chemical stabilizers into any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. (vii) Enclosure: construct a three‐sided structure equal to or greater than the height of the pile to shelter the pile from the predominant winds. (c) Additional requirements: (i) Stockpile permit compliance: comply with all conditions and requirements under any stockpile permit required under the Code or the Land Use Code. (ii) Erosion control plan compliance: implement and comply with all conditions and requirements in Section §26‐500 “Fort Collins Storm Criteria”; specifically, Volume 3 Chapter 7 “Construction BMPs”. The criteria requirement may require the use of Erosion Control Materials, soil stockpile height limit of ten feet, watering, surface roughening, vegetation, silt fence and other control measures as contained in that chapter. Left: This picture illustrates one of the additional best management practices for stockpiles – to use a synthetic cover. Page 14 3.4 Street Sweeping Left: This figure illustrates the use of a wet suppression and vacuum system, an additional best management practice for street sweeping. Street sweeping is an effective method for removing dirt and debris from streets and preventing it from entering storm drains or becoming airborne. Regenerative air sweepers and mechanical sweepers with water spray can also be effective at removing particulate matter from hard surfaces. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any owner or operator that conducts sweeping operations or services on paved or concrete roads, parking lots, rights‐of‐way, pedestrian ways, plazas or other solid surfaces, and whose operations are a dust generating activity or source shall implement the following best management practices to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Uncontrolled sweeping prohibited: the use of rotary brushes, power brooms, or other mechanical sweeping for the removal of dust, dirt, mud, or other debris from a paved public road, right‐of‐way, or parking lot without the use of water, vacuum system with filtration, or other equivalent dust control method is prohibited. Mechanical or manual sweeping that occurs between lifts of asphalt paving operations or due to preparation for pavement makings is excluded from this prohibition, due to engineering requirements associated with these operations. (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.4(a)(i) is ineffective to prevent off‐property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Wet suppression: use a light spray of water or wetting agent applied directly to work area or use equipment with water spray system while operating sweeper or power broom. Prevent water used for dust control from entering any storm drainage facility or watercourse. (ii) Vacuum system: use sweeper or power broom equipped with a vacuum collection and filtration system. (iii) Other method: use any other method to control dust emissions that has a demonstrated particulate matter control efficiency of 80 percent or more. Page 15 3.5 Track‐out / Carry‐out Above: This figure illustrates an installed grate (left) and a gravel bed (right), both of which are additional best management practices associated with track‐out/carry‐out. Mud, dirt, and other debris can be carried from a site on equipment’s wheels or undercarriage onto public roads. When this material dries, it can become airborne by wind activity or when other vehicles travel on it. This is a health concern and can cause visibility issues and safety hazards. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any owner or operator of any operation that has the potential to result in track‐out of dirt, dust, or debris on public roads and rights‐of‐way and whose operation is a dust generating activity or source shall implement the following best management practices to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Contracts and standards: comply with track‐out prevention requirements and construction best management practices as set forth in the Code, City regulations, or policies and as specified in applicable contract documents or Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual. (ii) Remove deposition: promptly remove any deposition that occurs on public roads or rights‐ of‐way as a result of the owner’s or operator’s operations. Avoid over‐watering and prevent runoff into any storm drainage facility or watercourse. (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.5(a)(i)‐(ii) are ineffective to prevent off‐ property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Install rails, pipes, grate, or similar track‐out control device. (ii) Install a gravel bed track‐out apron that extends at least 50 feet from the intersection with a public road or right‐of‐way. (iii) Install gravel bed track‐out apron with steel cattle guard or concrete wash rack. (iv) Install and utilize on‐site vehicle and equipment washing station. (v) Install a paved surface that extends at least 100 feet from the intersection with a public road or right‐of‐way. (vi) Manually remove mud, dirt, and debris from equipment and vehicle wheels, tires and undercarriage. Page 16 3.6 Bulk Materials Transport Above: This figure illustrates covered loads, a required best management practice for bulk materials transport. Haul trucks are used to move bulk materials, such as dirt, rock, demolition debris, or mulch to and from construction sites, material suppliers and storage yards. Dust emissions from haul trucks, if uncontrolled, can be a safety hazard by impairing visibility or by depositing debris on roads, pedestrians, bicyclists, or other vehicles. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any owner or operator of a dust generating activity or source for which vehicles used for transporting bulk materials to and from a site within the City on a public or private road or on a public right‐of‐way shall prevent off‐vehicle transport of fugitive dust emissions. To prevent off‐vehicle transport of fugitive dust to and from the site, the owner or operator shall implement the following measures : (i) Cover Loads: Loads shall be completely covered or all material enclosed in a manner that prevents the material from blowing, dropping, sifting, leaking, or otherwise escaping from the vehicle. This includes the covering of hot asphalt and asphalt patching material with a tarp or other impermeable material. (ii) Minimize drop height: Drivers and operators shall unload truck beds and loader or excavator buckets slowly, and minimize drop height of materials to the lowest height possible, including screening operations. Page 17 (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.6(a)(i)‐(ii) are ineffective to prevent off‐ vehicle transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Wet suppression: apply water to bulk materials loaded for transport as necessary to prevent fugitive dust emissions and deposition of materials on roadways. Prevent water used for dust control from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (ii) Chemical stabilization: apply chemical stabilizers using manufacturer’s recommended application rates. Avoid over‐application and prevent runoff of chemical stabilizers into any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. (iii) Other technology: use other equivalent technology that effectively eliminates off‐vehicle transport, such as limiting the load size to provide at least three inches of freeboard to prevent spillage. Above: This figure illustrates minimizing drop heights, a required best management practice for bulk materials transport. Page 18 3.7 Unpaved Roads and Haul Roads Above: This figure illustrates surface improvements on an unpaved road, an additional best management practice. Road dust from unpaved roads is caused by particles lifted by and dropped from rolling wheels traveling on the road surface and from wind blowing across the road surface. Road dust can aggravate heart and lung conditions as well as cause safety issues such as decreased driver visibility and other safety hazards. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any owner or operator of an unpaved road located on a construction site greater than five acres on private property or an unpaved road used as a public right‐ of‐way shall implement the following best management practices to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Reduce vehicle speeds: establish a maximum speed limit or install traffic calming devices to reduce speeds to a rate that prevents off‐property transport of dust entrained by vehicles. (ii) Restrict access: restrict travel on unpaved roads by limiting access to only authorized vehicle use. (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.7(a)(i)‐(ii) are ineffective to prevent off‐ property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Wet suppression: apply water to unpaved road surface as necessary and appropriate considering current weather conditions, and prevent water used for dust control from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (ii) Surface improvements: install gravel or similar materials with sufficient depth to reduce dust or pave high traffic areas. Page 19 (iii) Chemical stabilization: apply chemical stabilizers appropriate for high traffic areas using manufacturer’s recommended application rates. Avoid over‐application and prevent runoff of chemical stabilizers into any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. (iv) Access road location: locate site access roads away from residential or other populated areas. Above: This figure illustrates wet suppression, an additional best management practice for unpaved and haul roads. Page 20 3.8 Parking Lots Above: This figure illustrates an unpaved parking lot in Fort Collins. This section applies to paved and unpaved areas where vehicles are parked or stored on a routine basis and includes parking areas for shopping, recreation, or events; automobile or vehicle storage yards; and animal staging areas. Best Management Practices to Control Dust‐ Unpaved Parking Lots (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any owners or operator of an unpaved parking lot greater than one‐half acre shall use at least one of the following best management practices to prevent off‐ property transport of fugitive dust emissions (i) Surface improvements: install gravel or similar materials with sufficient depth to reduce dust or pave high traffic areas. (ii) Vegetation: plant vegetation appropriate for retaining soils or creating a wind break. (iii) Wet suppression: apply water as necessary and appropriate considering current weather conditions to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions. Prevent water used for dust control from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (iv) Chemical stabilization: apply chemical stabilizers appropriate for high traffic areas using manufacturer’s recommended application rates. Avoid over‐application and prevent runoff of chemical stabilizers into any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. (v) Wind barrier: construct a fence or other type of wind barrier. Page 21 (vi) Reduce vehicle speeds: establish a maximum speed limit or install traffic calming devices to reduce speeds to a rate that prevents off‐property transport of dust entrained by vehicles. (vii) Restrict access: restrict travel in parking lots to only those vehicles with essential duties and limit access to hours of operation or specific events. Best Management Practices to Control Dust‐ Paved Parking Lots (a) Required Best Management Practices: An owner or operator of a paved parking lot greater than one‐half acre and shall use at least one of the following best management practices to prevent off‐ property transport of fugitive dust emissions. (i) Maintenance: repair potholes and cracks and maintain surface improvements. (ii) Mechanical sweeping: Sweep lot with a vacuum sweeper and light water spray as necessary to remove dirt and debris. Avoid overwatering and prevent runoff from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (iii) Reduce vehicle speeds: establish a maximum speed limit or install traffic calming devices to reduce speeds to a rate that prevents off‐property transport of dust entrained by vehicles. (iv) Restrict access: restrict travel in parking lots to only those vehicles with essential duties and limit access to hours of operation or specific events. Above: This photo represents improving the surface of a parking area, which is one measure to comply with the Manual. Page 22 3.9 Open Areas and Vacant Lots Above: These photos illustrate open areas in Fort Collins, which have the potential to generate dust. Open areas are typically not a significant source of wind‐blown dust emissions if the coverage of vegetation is sufficient or soil crusts are intact. However, if soils in open areas are disturbed by vehicle traffic, off‐highway vehicle use, bicycling or grazing, or if they have become overpopulated by prairie dogs, dust emissions can become a problem. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any owner or operator of an open area greater than one‐half acre shall use at least one of the following best management practices to stabilize disturbed or exposed soil surface areas that are intended to or remain exposed for 30 days or more and to prevent off‐ property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Vegetation: plant vegetation appropriate for retaining soils or creating a wind break. (ii) Synthetic or natural cover: install cover materials over exposed areas during periods of inactivity and properly anchor the cover. (iii) Surface roughening: stabilize an exposed area during periods of inactivity or when vegetation cannot be immediately established. (iv) Soil retention: stabilize disturbed or exposed soil surface areas that will be inactive for more than 30 days or while vegetation is being established, using mulch, compost, soil mats, or other methods. (v) Wet suppression: apply water to disturbed soil surfaces as necessary and appropriate considering current weather to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions. Prevent water used for dust control from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (vi) Wind barrier: construct a fence or other type of wind barrier to prevent wind erosion of top soils. Page 23 (vii) Chemical stabilization: apply chemical stabilizers using manufacturer’s recommended application rates. Avoid over‐application and prevent runoff of chemical stabilizers into any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Asphalt‐based products or any product containing cationic polyacrylamide or products deemed environmentally incompatible with Code §26‐498, or defined as a pollutant per Code §26‐491, or explicitly prohibited by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the state of Colorado may not be used for chemical stabilization. Water soluble plant‐based oils or gums, clay additives, or other synthetic polymer emulsion that are non‐toxic, non‐combustible, and harmless to fish, wildlife, plants, pets, and humans may be used for chemical stabilization. Above: This photo represents adding vegetation by hydroseeding, which is one measure to comply with the Manual. Page 24 3.10 Saw Cutting and Grinding Above: This photo illustrates concrete cutting and how the activity can generate dust. Cutting and grinding of asphalt, concrete and other masonry materials can be a significant short‐term source of fugitive dust that may expose workers and the public to crystalline silica. Inhalation of silica can cause lung disease known as silicosis and has been linked to other diseases such as tuberculosis and lung cancer. Using additional best management practices during cutting and grinding operations can significantly reduce dust emissions. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any person, owner, or operator that cuts or grinds asphalt, concrete, brick, tile, stone, or other masonry materials and whose operations are a dust generating activity or source shall use the following best management practices to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Restrict access: prevent the public from entering the area where dust emissions occur. (ii) High winds restriction: temporarily halt work activities during high wind events greater than 30 mph if operations would result in off‐property transport. (iii) Equipment and work area clean up: use wet wiping, wet sweeping, or vacuuming with HEPA filtration for equipment and work area clean up and do not cause dust to become airborne during clean up. (iv) Slurry clean up: prevent water used for dust control or clean up from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse by using containment, vacuuming, absorption, or other method to remove the slurry, and dispose of slurry and containment materials properly. Follow additional procedures prescribed in the City’s Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual or contract documents and specifications. Page 25 (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.10(a)(i)‐(iv) are ineffective to prevent off‐ property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) On‐tool local exhaust ventilation: use a tool‐mounted dust capture and collection system. (ii) On‐tool wet suppression: use a tool‐mounted water application system. (iii) Vacuuming: use a vacuum equipped with a HEPA filter simultaneously with cutting or grinding operations. (iv) Wet suppression: use a water sprayer or hose simultaneously with cutting or grinding operations. (v) Enclosure: conduct cutting or grinding within an enclosure with a dust collection system or temporary tenting over the work area. Above: These photos illustrate how dust generated from cutting can be minimized by applying on‐tool wet suppression, an additional best management practice associated with saw cutting and grinding. Page 26 3.11 Abrasive Blasting Above: This photo illustrates abrasive blasting without dust mitigation in place. Abrasive blasting is used to smooth rough surfaces; roughen smooth surfaces; and remove paint, dirt, grease, and other coatings from surfaces. Abrasive blasting media may consist of sand; glass, plastic or metal beads; aluminum oxide; corn cobs; or other materials. Abrasive blasting typically generates a significant amount of fugitive dust if not controlled. The material removed during abrasive blasting can become airborne and may contain silica, lead, cadmium or other byproducts removed from the surface being blasted.* Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any person, owner, or operator who conducts outdoor abrasive blasting or indoor abrasive blasting with uncontrolled emissions vented to the outside and whose operations are a dust generating activity or source shall implement the following best management practices to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions: (i) Restrict access: prevent the public from entering the area where dust emissions occur. (ii) High winds restriction: temporarily halt work activities during high wind events greater than 30 mph if operations would result in off‐property transport. (iii) Equipment and work area clean up: use wet wiping, wet sweeping, or vacuuming with HEPA filtration for equipment and work area clean up and do not cause dust to become airborne during clean up. (iv) Slurry clean up: prevent water used for dust control or clean up from entering any public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse by using containment, vacuuming, absorption, or other method to remove the slurry, and dispose of slurry and containment materials properly. (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.11(a)(i)‐(iv) are ineffective to prevent off‐ property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Enclosure: conduct abrasive blasting within an enclosure with a dust collection system or temporary tenting over the work area. Page 27 (ii) Wet suppression blasting: use one of several available methods that mix water with the abrasive media or air during blasting operations. (iii) Vacuum blasting: conduct air‐based blasting that uses a nozzle attachment with negative air pressure to capture dust. (iv) Abrasive media: select less toxic, lower dust‐generating blasting media. * Blasting on surfaces that contain lead paint or wastes from sand blasting that contain hazardous materials may be subject to additional state and federal requirements. Above: This photo illustrates wet suppression blasting, an additional best management practice. Page 28 3.12 Mechanical Blowing Above: This photo illustrates mechanical blowing without dust mitigation in place. Mechanical blowers are commonly used to move dirt, sand, leaves, grass clippings and other landscaping debris to a central location for easier pick‐up and removal. Mechanical blowing with a leaf blower can be a significant source of fugitive dust in some situations and can create nuisance conditions and cause health effects for sensitive individuals. Mechanical blowing can resuspend dust particles that contain allergens, pollens, and molds, as well as pesticides, fecal contaminants, and toxic metals causing allergic reactions, asthma attacks and exacerbating other respiratory illnesses. Best Management Practices to Control Dust (a) Required Best Management Practices: Any person, owner, or operator who operates a mechanical leaf blower (gas, electric, or battery‐powered) in a manner that is a dust generating activity or source shall use the following best management practices as necessary to prevent off‐property transport of fugitive dust emissions (i) Low speed: use the lowest speed appropriate for the task and equipment. (ii) Operation: use the full length of the blow tube and place the nozzle as close to the ground as possible. (iii) High winds restriction: temporarily halt work activities during high wind events greater than 30 mph if operations would result in off‐property transport. (b) Additional Best Management Practices: In the event 3.11(a)(i)‐(iii) are ineffective to prevent off‐ property transport, the person, owner, or operator shall use at least one of the following best management practices: (i) Alternative method: use an alternative such as a rake, broom, shovel, manually push sweeper or a vacuum machine equipped with a filtration system. (ii) Prevent impact: do not blow dust and debris off‐property or in close proximity to people, animals, open windows, air intakes, or onto adjacent property, public right‐of‐way, storm drainage facility, or watercourse. Page 29 (iii) Minimize use on dirt: minimize the use of mechanical blower on unpaved surfaces, road shoulders, or loose dirt. (iv) Wet suppression: use a light spray of water, as necessary and appropriate considering current weather conditions, to dampen dusty work areas. Prevent water, dirt, and debris from entering any storm drainage facility, or watercourse. (v) Remove debris: remove and properly dispose of blown material immediately. Above: These photos illustrate alternative methods to mechanical blowing that can minimize dust generation. Page 30 4.0 Dust Control Plan for Land Development Greater Than Five Acres A dust control plan is required for all development projects or construction sites with a total disturbed surface area equal to or greater than five (5) acres. If the project is required to obtain a development construction permit, then the dust control plan shall be submitted with the development review application or the development construction permit application. A copy of the dust control plan shall be available onsite at all times for compliance and inspection purposes. For dust control plans associated with a Development Construction Permit (DCP), applications for the DCP are available online at www.fcgov.com/developmentreview/applications.php. The dust control plan may be submitted on the Dust Control Plan Form included in Chapter 4 of this Manual or other equivalent format and shall include the following information:  Project name and location.  Name and contact information of property owner.  Project start and completion dates.  Name and contact information of the developer, general contractor, and each contractor or operator that will be engaged in an earthmoving activity.  Total size of the development project or construction site in acres.  A description of the project phasing or sequencing of the project to minimize the amount of disturbed surface area at any one time during the project.  A list of each dust generating activity or source associated with the project.  A list of each best management practice and engineering control that will be implemented for each dust generating activity or source.  A list of additional best management practices that will be implemented if initial controls are ineffective.  A signed statement from the property owner, developer, general contractor, and each contractor or operator engaged in an earthmoving activity acknowledging receipt of the Dust Control Plan and an understanding of and ability to comply with the best management practices in the plan. Page 31 DUST CONTROL PLAN PROJECT INFORMATION Project Name Project Location Start and Completion Dates Total Size of Project Site (acres) Maximum disturbed surface area at any one time (acres) Property Owner name, address, phone, e‐mail Developer name, address, phone, e‐mail General Contractor name, address, phone, e‐mail Subcontractor or Operator of a dust generating activity or source name, address, phone, e‐mail Subcontractor or Operator of a dust generating activity or source name, address, phone, e‐mail Subcontractor or Operator of a dust generating activity or source name, address, phone, e‐mail PROJECT PHASING OR SEQUENCING Provide a description of how this project will be phased or sequenced to minimize the disturbed surface area. Attach phasing plan or map if available. Page 32 DUST CONTROL PLAN CERTIFICATION I certify the information and attachments contained in this Dust Control Plan are true and correct to the best of my knowledge and that I and the project's subcontractors have received a copy of this Dust Control Plan and acknowledge my understanding of and ability to comply with best management practices for controlling fugitive dust emissions. I hereby permit City officials to enter upon the property for the purpose of inspection of any dust generating activity or source for which I am the responsible person, owner, or operator. Name: ________________________________________________________________________________ Title: ___________________________________ Role on project: ________________________________ Address: ________________________________________________ Phone: __________________________ Signature: ___________________________________________________ Date: ____________________ * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * List of Subcontractors: Title: ___________________________________ Role on project: ________________________________ Title: ____________________________________ Role on project: ________________________________ Title: ___________________________________ Role on project: ________________________________ Title: ____________________________________Role on project: ________________________________ Title: ____________________________________Role on project: ________________________________ Title: ___________________________________ Role on project: ________________________________ Title: ___________________________________ Role on project: ________________________________ Title: ___________________________________ Role on project: ________________________________ Page 33 Instructions: Place an X in each box indicating all best management practices that will be implemented for each dust generating activity. Please refer to the Dust Prevention and Control Manual for requirements. Dust Generating Activity  /Best Management Practice  Earthmoving Demolition/ Renovation Stockpile Street Sweeping Track‐out /Carry‐ out Bulk Materials Transport Unpaved Roads and Haul Roads Parking Lot Open Area Saw Cutting or Grinding Abrasive Blasting Leaf Blowing . Abrasive media Asbestos or lead materials Building permit Chemical stabilization Construction sequencing Drop height Enclosure Equipment &work area clean up Erosion Control plan High winds restriction Load cover Leaf blowing techniques Location Minimize disturbed area On‐tool local exhaust ventilation On‐tool wet suppression Other method Reduce vehicle speeds Remove deposition Restrict access Slurry clean up Soil retention Stockpile permit Surface improvements Surface roughening Sweeping Synthetic or natural cover Track‐out prevention system Uncontrolled sweeping prohibited Vacuum Vegetation Wet suppression Wind barrier Describe any additional dust generating activities and best management practices that will be used: Page 34 5.0 Resources 5.1 Cross Reference to Codes, Standards, Regulations, and Policies Earthmoving Activities Fort Collins Land Use Code Article 3 General Development Standards §3.2.2 Access, Circulation and Parking. Fort Collins Land Use Code Article 3 General Development Standards §3.4.1(N) Standards for Protection During Construction. Fort Collins Land Use Code Article 3 General Development Standards §3.4.2 Air Quality. Fort Collins City Code, Chapter 5 Buildings and Building Regulations, Section 5‐27 (59) §3602.1.1 Building demolitions. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 23 Public Property §23‐16. Permit required; exception in case of emergency. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual, Volume 3, Chapter 7, Section 1.3 Policy, Standards and Submittal Requirements, §1.3.3.e.5. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual – Fact Sheet SM‐1 Construction Phasing/Sequencing and Fact Sheet EC‐1 Surface Roughening. Larimer County Land Use Code §8.11.4. Fugitive dust during construction. State of Colorado, Air Quality Control Commission, 5 CCR 1001‐3, Regulation No. 1, §III.D.2.b Construction Activities. OSHA Safety and Health Regulations for Construction 29 CFR Part 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and mists. Demolition and Renovation Fort Collins Land Use Code, Division 2.7 Building Permits §2.7.1 Fort Collins City Code, Chapter 5 Buildings and Building Regulations, Section 5‐27 (59) §3602.1.1 Building demolitions. Page 35 Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. State of Colorado, Air Quality Control Commission, Regulation Number 8, Part B Control of Hazardous Air Pollutants, 5 CCR 1001‐10. Stockpiles Fort Collins Land Use Code, Division 2.6 Stockpiling Permits and Development Construction Permits §2.6.2. Fort Collins Land Use Code §2.6.3 (K) Stockpiling Permit and Development Construction Permit Review Procedures. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual Volume 3, Chapter 7, Section 1.3 Policy, Standards and Submittal Requirements, §1.3.3.e.7. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual ‐ Fact Sheet MM‐2 Stockpile Management. State of Colorado, Air Quality Control Commission, 5 CCR 1001‐3, Regulation No. 1, §III.D.2.c Storage and Handling of Materials. Street Sweeping Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual ‐ Fact Sheet SM‐7 Street Sweeping and Vacuuming. Track‐out/Carry‐out Fort Collins Traffic Code, Part 1407 Spilling loads on highways prohibited. Fort Collins Land Use Code §5.2.1 Definitions Maintenance (of a newly constructed street). Fort Collins City Code: Chapter 20 – Nuisances, Article V ‐ Dirt, Debris and Construction Waste, §Sec. 20‐62. Depositing on streets prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual, Volume 3, Chapter 7, Section 1.3 Policy, Standards and Submittal Requirements, §1.3.3.e.8. Page 36 Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual – Fact Sheet SM‐4 Vehicle Tracking Control. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual – Fact Sheet SM‐7 Street Sweeping and Vacuuming. State of Colorado, Air Quality Control Commission, 5 CCR 1001‐3, Regulation No. 1, §III.D.2.a.(ii).(B) General Requirements. Bulk Materials Transport Fort Collins Traffic Code, Part 1407 Spilling loads on highways prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. State of Colorado, Air Quality Control Commission, 5 CCR 1001‐3, Regulation No. 1, §III.D.2.f Haul Trucks. Colorado Revised Statutes. 42‐4‐1407 Spilling loads on highways prohibited. Unpaved Roads and Haul Roads Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. State of Colorado, Air Quality Control Commission, 5 CCR 1001‐3, Regulation No. 1, §III.D.2.a Roadways and §III.D.2.e Haul Roads. Parking Lots Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Open Areas and Vacant Lots Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Saw Cutting and Grinding Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual – Fact Sheet SM‐12 Paving and Grinding Operations. Page 37 Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 208.04 Best Management Practices for Stormwater. Abrasive Blasting Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. Mechanical (Leaf) Blowing Fort Collins City Code Chapter 20 Nuisances, Article 1 In General, §20‐1 Air pollution nuisances prohibited. Fort Collins City Code Chapter 26 Utilities, Article VII Stormwater Utility, §26‐498 Water quality control. 5.2 City of Fort Collins Manuals and Policies Fort Collins Stormwater Criteria Manual http://www.fcgov.com/utilities/business/builders‐and‐ developers/development‐forms‐guidelines‐regulations/stormwater‐criteria City of Fort Collins Parks and Recreation Environmental Best Management Practices Manual 2011, Chapter Four: Best Management Practices for Construction http://www.fcgov.com/parks/pdf/bmp.pdf City of Fort Collins Building Design and Construction Standards, Oct. 2013 http://www.fcgov.com/opserv/pdf/building‐design‐standards2.pdf?1390850442 City of Fort Collins, Recommended Species and Application Rates of Perennial Native Upland Grass Seed for Fort Collins, Colorado. City of Fort Collins Plant List, April 2011. 5.3 References for Dust Control Leaf Blowing A Report to the California Legislature on the Potential Health and Environmental Impacts of Leaf Blowers, California Environmental Protection Agency – Air Resources Board, Feb. 2000. http://www.arb.ca.gov/msprog/mailouts/msc0005/msc0005.pdf Abrasive Blasting Sandblasting and Other Air‐based Blasting Fact Sheet, Minnesota Pollution Control Agency, Dec. 2011. Protecting Workers from the Hazards of Abrasive Blasting Materials, OSHA Fact Sheet. California Air Resources Board, Abrasive Blasting Program. http://www.arb.ca.gov/ba/certabr/certabr.htm Page 38 Saw Cutting OSHA Fact Sheet on Crystalline Silica Exposure https://www.osha.gov/OshDoc/data_General_Facts/crystalline‐factsheet.pdf State of New Jersey – Dry Cutting and Grinding Fact Sheet http://www.state.nj.us/health/surv/documents/dry_cutting.pdf Centers for Disease Control and Prevention ‐ Engineering Controls for Silica in Construction http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/silica/cutoffsaws.html Shepherd‐S; Woskie‐S, Controlling Dust from Concrete Saw Cutting. Journal of Occupational and Environmental Hygiene, 2013 Feb; 10(2):64‐70. http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/nioshtic‐2/20042808.html Akbar‐Khanzadeh F, Milz SA, Wagner CD, Bisesi MS, Ames AL, Khuder S, Susi P, Akbar‐Khanzadeh M, Effectiveness of dust control methods for crystalline silica and respirable suspended particulate matter exposure during manual concrete surface grinding. Journal of Occupational and Environmental Hygiene, 2010 Dec;7(12):700‐11. http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/21058155 HSE, On‐Tool Controls to Reduce Exposure to Respirable Dusts in the Construction Industry – A Review. Health and Safety Executive, RR926, 2012, Derbyshire, U.K. http://www.hse.gov.uk/research/rrpdf/rr926.pdf Croteau G, Guffey S, Flanagan ME, Seixas N, The Effect of Local Exhaust Ventilation Controls on Dust Exposures During Concrete Cutting and Grinding Activities. American Industrial Hygiene Association Journal, 2002 63:458–467 http://deohs.washington.edu/sites/default/files/images/general/CroteauThesis.pdf Unpaved Roads, Parking Lots, and Open Areas Dust Control from Unpaved Roads and Surfaces, Code 373, USDA‐NRCS, April 2010. http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/Internet/FSE_DOCUMENTS/nrcs143_025946.pdf CPWA, 2005, Dust Control for Unpaved Roads, A Best Practice by the National Guide to Sustainable Municipal Infrastructure, Canadian Public Works Association. Colorado Forest Road Field Handbook, Colorado State Forest, Editor: Richard M. Edwards, CF; CSFS Assistant Staff Forester, July 2011. Fay L., Kociolek A., Road Dust Management and Future Needs: 2008 Conference Proceedings, Western Transportation Institute, March 2009. Chemical Stabilizers Interim Guidelines on Dust Palliative Use in Clark County, Nevada. Nevada Division of Environmental Protection, Feb. 2001. http://ndep.nv.gov/admin/dustpa1.pdf Bolander, Peter, ed. 1999. Dust Palliative Selection and Application Guide. Project Report. 9977‐1207‐ SDTDC. San Dimas, CA: U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service, San Dimas Technology and Development Center. http://www.fs.fed.us/eng/pubs/html/99771207/99771207.html Page 39 Techniques for Fugitive Dust Control – Chemical Suppressants, City of Albuquerque NM, website last accessed on Oct. 25, 2014. http://www.cabq.gov/airquality/business‐programs‐permits/ordinances/fugitive‐dust/fugitive‐dust‐ control USDA BioPreferred Catalog: Dust Suppressants http://www.biopreferred.gov/BioPreferred/faces/catalog/Catalog.xhtml USGS Columbia Environmental Research Center Project: Environmental Effects of Dust Suppressant Chemicals on Roadside Plant and Animal Communities, http://www.cerc.usgs.gov/Projects.aspx?ProjectId=77 Street Sweeping U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, Stormwater Best Management Practices: Street Sweeper Fact Sheet. http://environment.fhwa.dot.gov/ecosystems/ultraurb/3fs16.asp Agriculture and Livestock Agricultural Air Quality Conservation Measures ‐ Reference Guide for Cropping Systems and General Land Management, USDA‐NRCS, Oct. 2012. http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/Internet/FSE_DOCUMENTS/stelprdb1049502.pdf Dust Control from Animal Activity on Open Lot Surfaces, Code 375, USDA‐NRCS, Sept. 2010. http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/Internet/FSE_DOCUMENTS/nrcs143_025821.pdf Residue and Tillage Management, Reduced Till, Code 345, USDA‐NRCS, Dec. 2013. http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/Internet/FSE_DOCUMENTS/stelprdb1251402.pdf Herbaceous Wind Barriers, Code 603, USDA‐NRCS, Jan. 2010. http://www.nrcs.usda.gov/Internet/FSE_DOCUMENTS/nrcs143_025927.pdf Michalewicz, D. A., J. D. Wanjura, B. W. Shaw, and C. B. Parnell. 2005. Evaluation of sources and controls of fugitive dust from agricultural operations. In Proc. 2005 Beltwide Cotton Conference. http://caaqes.tamu.edu/Publication‐Particulate%20Matter.html Harner J., Maghirang R., Razote E., Water Requirements for Dust Control on Feedlots, from the proceedings of Mitigating Air Emissions From Animal Feeding Operations Conference, May 2008. http://www.extension.org/pages/23966/water‐requirements‐for‐dust‐control‐on‐feedlots California Air Pollution Control Officers Association Agriculture Clearinghouse http://www.capcoa.org/ag‐clearinghouse/ U.S. Department of Agriculture Natural Resources Conservation Service ‐ Nevada, Fugitive Dust: A Guide to the Control of Windblown Dust on Agricultural Lands in Nevada. Jan. 2007. http://www.cdsn.org/images/FugitiveDustGuide_v7_201_.pdf Demolition and Renovation Page 40 CDPHE, Demolition and Asbestos Abatement forms and information https://www.colorado.gov/pacific/cdphe/asbestos‐forms Earthmoving Activities CDPHE, An Overview of Colorado Air Regulations for Land Development, August 2014 https://www.colorado.gov/pacific/sites/default/files/AP_Land‐Development‐Guidance‐Document_1.pdf Working With Dirt When the Wind Blows http://www.gradingandexcavation.com/GX/Articles/Working_With_Dirt_When_the_Wind_Blows_5455 .aspx EPA – Stormwater Best Management Practices: Dust Control http://water.epa.gov/polwaste/npdes/swbmp/Dust‐Control.cfm EPA – Stormwater Best Management Practices: Wind Fences and Sand Fences http://water.epa.gov/polwaste/npdes/swbmp/Wind‐Fences‐and‐Sand‐Fences.cfm EPA – Stormwater Best Management Practices: Construction Sequencing http://water.epa.gov/polwaste/npdes/swbmp/Construction‐Sequencing.cfm EPA – Stormwater Best Management Practices: Construction Entrances http://water.epa.gov/polwaste/npdes/swbmp/Construction‐Entrances.cfm An Overview of Colorado Air Regulations for Land Development. Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment – Air Pollution Control Division. https://www.colorado.gov/pacific/sites/default/files/AP_Land‐Development‐Guidance‐Document_1.pdf Health Effects of Particulate Matter U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Integrated Science Assessment for Particulate Matter. EPA/600/R‐08/139F Dec. 2009. http://cfpub.epa.gov/ncea/cfm/recordisplay.cfm?deid=216546#Download World Health Organization, Health Effects of Particulate Matter ‐ Policy. 2013 http://www.euro.who.int/__data/assets/pdf_file/0006/189051/Health‐effects‐of‐particulate‐matter‐ final‐Eng.pdf Preventing Silicosis in Construction Workers, NIOSH http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/docs/96‐112/ General Dust Abatement Handbook, Maricopa County Air Quality Department, June 2013. http://www.maricopa.gov/aq/divisions/compliance/dust/docs/pdf/Rule%20310‐Dust%20Handbook.pdf Fugitive Dust Control: Self Inspection Handbook, California Air Resources Board, 2007. http://www.arb.ca.gov/pm/fugitivedust_large.pdf WRAP Fugitive Dust Handbook, Western Governors’ Association. Sept. 2006. Page 41 Managing Fugitive Dust: A Guide for Compliance with the Air Regulatory Requirements for Particulate Matter Generation, Michigan Department of Environmental Quality. March 2014. Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission, Rules and Regulations, Rule 805 Odors and Dust http://cogcc.state.co.us/ activity or source. Particulate matter shall mean any material that is emitted into the air as finely divided solid or liquid particles, other than uncombined water, and includes dust, smoke, soot, fumes, aerosols and mists. Required best management practices shall mean specific measures that are required to be implemented if a dust generating activity is occurring. Sensitive area shall mean a specific area that warrants special protection from adverse impacts due to the deposition of fugitive dust, such as natural areas (excluding buffer zones), sources of water supply, wetlands, critical wildlife habitat, or wild and scenic river corridors. Soil retention shall mean the stabilization of disturbed surface areas that will remain exposed and inactive for 30 days or more or while vegetation is being established using mulch, compost, soil mats, or other methods. off‐property or off‐vehicle transport. Dust generating activity or source shall include a paved parking lot containing an area of more than one half (1/2) acre. Earthmoving shall mean any process that involves land clearing, disturbing soil surfaces, or moving, loading, or handling of earth, dirt, soil, sand, aggregate, or similar materials. Fugitive dust shall mean solid particulate matter emitted into the air by mechanical processes or natural forces but is not emitted through a stack, chimney, or vent FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS MARCH 4, 2016 E1.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING & POWER PLAN WHA-1 WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR - JAY R. SMITH, 5200. HYDROTROL JUNIOR, PISTON TYPE WATER HAMMER ARRESTOR. SEE MFG RECS N/A N/A N/A N/A FD-1 FLOOR DRAIN - ZURN, MODEL ZN415BZ-VP, LEVELING STRAINER, NICKLE BRONZE FINISH, AND VANDEL PROOF SCREWS. PROVIDE WITH PROSET TRAP GUARD, MODEL TG33-Z. N/A N/A SEE DWGS SEE DWGS N/A GCO-1 GRADE CLEAN OUT- BY ZURN, Z1474-VP. HEAVY DUTY CLEANOUT WITH CAST IRON BODY AND VANDEL PROOF SCREWS. N/A N/A SEE DWGS N/A N/A WCO-1 WALL CLEAN OUT - ZURN, MODEL Z1441. N/A N/A SEE DWGS N/A N/A CO-1 CLEAN OUT - WATTS, CO-380, CAST IRON, GASKETED BRASS PLUG WITH NO HUB CONNECTION. N/A N/A SEE DWGS SEE DWGS N/A AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE TAG SERVICE MFR. MODEL MOUNTING MATERIAL FINISH NOMINAL DUCT SIZE (IN) SLEEVE LENGTH (IN) REMARKS A1 SUPPLY TITUS SG-PR SIDEWALL STEEL WHITE SEE DWG 10 1,2 B1 EXHAUST TITUS SG-PR SIDEWALL STEEL WHITE SEE DWG 10 2 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE WITH STEEL, FACE-OPERATED, OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER. 2. PROVIDE WITH ANGLE FRAME FOR MOUNTING. ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR SCHEDULE MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL TYPE DRIVE CFM FLA V/PH REMARKS ERV-1 RENEWAIRE EV450IN INDOOR, FAN POWERED DIRECT 375 9 120/1 1,2,3,4 NOTES: 1. ECM MOTOR 2. PROVIDE WITH MANUFACTURERS 10" ROUND FLANGE KIT FOR SUPPLY AND EXH 3. PROVIDE WITH FACTORY INTEGRAL BACKDRAFT DAMPERS 4. PROVIDE WITH MANUFACTURERS FLUSH MOUNTED WALL CAP FOR SUPPLY AND EXH INFRARED RADIATIVE HEATER SCHEDULE MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL WATTS DIMENSIONS BTUH VOLTAGE/PH AMPS REMARKS RP-1 RAYWALL CP805 500 2'X4' 1,707 208/1 2 1 RP-2 RAYWALL CP803 375 2'X2' 1,280 208/1 2 1 NOTES: 1. THERMOSTATS PROVIDED SEPARATELY, SEE PLANS FOR LOCATION AND SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ELECTRIC WATER HEATER SCHEDULE PLAN MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL RECOVERY GPM @ 60 DEG. KW INPUT NUMBER OF ELEMENTS VOLTS PHASE HEIGHT (IN.) WIDTH (IN.) DEPTH (IN.) SHIPPING WEIGHT (LBS.) REMARKS EWH-1 STIEBEL ELTRON TEMPRA 29 2.5 21.6 3 208 3 14 1/2 16 5/8 4 5/8 19 SET DISCHARGE AT 120°F, ADJUSTABLE. ANGLE MOUNTING FRAME SEE FLOOR PLANS FOR DUCT SIDEWALL PENETRATIONS COLLAR SIZE IS O.D. DUCT +1/4" TAMPER RESISTANT SIDEWALL GRILLE SLEEVE FULL LENGTH OF WALL WIDTH PLUS MIN 1.5" FOR MOUNTING ANGLE IRON EA: Exhaust Air to outside OA: Outside Air intake RA: Room Air to be exhausted FA: Fresh Air to inside All Other Access: Screw-attached Panel Filter Access: Hinged & Latched Door 10" Dia Round (Optional 45EVT10 Transition Kit Shown) Power Wiring Inlet 7/8" Dia Control Wiring Inlet 7/8" Dia 12"x 8" rectangular flange (Optional 45EVDF Kit Shown) Disconnect Switch Power Wiring Inlet 7/8" Dia Control Wiring Inlet 7/8" Dia FA RA EA OA LEFT VIEWS RIGHT VIEWS BOTTOM VIEW 33 7/8" 18" 44 1/8" 35 1/4" 36 3/8" 2 1/8" 8" C/C TYP FRONT VIEW Pressure Ports (4) 26 1/4" 6 3/8" 10 1/8" 11 1/4" 25 1/4" 11 7/8" 20 1/4" 11 7/8" 4 1/4" 7 7/8" 2 1/8" 11 7/8" 11 7/8" 20 1/4" 4 1/4" 7/8" 7 7/8" 34 1/8" Service Area 1 1/2" Clearance Required to Remove Door 14 1/4" 4 1/8" 2 1/4" 15 7/8" 2 5/8" FLAT ON BOTTOM VOLUME DAMPER (TYPICAL) AIR AIR FLOW R R W (R = W) WHERE POSSIBLE FULL RADIUS 45 DEGREE CLINCH COLLAR SPLITTERS ARE NOT USED AT THIS TYPE OF ENTRY A SET SCREW VERTICAL RETURN DUCT 20° MAXIMUM R=3/4W AIR FLOW W SUB BRANCH MAIN BRANCH MAIN BRANCH AIR FLOW R W R = W STANDARD RADIUS ELBOW W1 V.D. W2 W = 4" MIN. IF W1 DOES NOT EQUAL W2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS MUST BE MADE IN VANE SHAPE OR ANGLE OF ENTRY AND EXIT. THIS APPLIES TO ALL TYPES OF VANES. 30 DEGREES MAXIMUM ON CONVERGING FLOW ACCESS DOOR FLOW AIR FLOW VOLUME DAMPER W SEE DUCT CONSTRUCTION DETAILS FOR CONNECTIONS 20 DEGREES MAXIMUM ON DIVERGING FLOW SPLITTER MAY BE USED HINGE OR ROD R=A+3/4W SEAM AIR FLOW AIR FLOW VARIOUS TYPES OF DUCT CONSTUCTION - USE APPLICABLE TYPE: REFERENCE MECHANICAL VENTILATION PLANS (110 DEG F MAX) HOT WATER SUPPLY TYPICAL STOP COLD WATER SUPPLY TW CW CW TMV TYPICAL LAVATORY SEALANT ALL AROUND METAL PUM-LOK CLAMPING RING SINGLE-PLY VENT PIPE FLASHING WELD TO MEMBRANE SEALANT CL VENT STACK EXTENSION SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE, FASTEN WITH APPROVED FASTENERS AND PRESSURE PLATES. ROOFING ROOF CONSTRUCTION ROOF DECK 12" MIN. VENT STACK CONTINUOUS PIPE WITH INSULATION IN EXPOSED ESCUTCHEON LOCATIONS PACK WITH FIRE CAULK MINERAL WOOL SLEEVE (TYPICAL) BARRIER AND VAPOR NOTE: PIPE PENETRATION SHOWN DEPICTS COLD PIPING ONLY. DISCONTINUE INSULATION THRU PENETRATIONS FOR HOT PIPING. - PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 3/4/2016 2:59:52 PM MP1.2 12-31.34 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DETAILS AND SPECS OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO 03/04/2016 NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 03/04/16 Scale: N.T.S. 1 SIDEWALL GRILLE Scale: N.T.S. 2 TYPICAL DUCT CONSTRUCTION DETAIL Energy Recovery Ventilator Part I - General A. Product Specification 1. Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) basis of design is the EV450IN manufactured by RenewAire and shall transfer both heat and humidity using static plate core technology. Equal equipment by different manufacturer must be approved. B. Quality Assurance 1. The energy recovery cores used in these products shall be third party Certified by AHRI under its Standard 1060 for Energy Recovery Ventilators. AHRI published certifications shall confirm manufacture’s published performance for airflow, static pressure, temperature and total effectiveness, purge air (OACF) and exhaust air leakage (EATR). Products that are not currently AHRI Certified will not be accepted. 2. Manufacturer shall be able to provide evidence of independent testing of the core by Underwriters Laboratory (UL), verifying a maximum flame spread index (FSI) of 25 and a maximum smoke developed index (SDI) of 50 thereby meeting NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B requirements for materials in a compartment handling air intended for circulation through a duct system. The method of test shall be UL Standard 723. 3. Unit shall be Listed under UL 1812 Standard for Ducted Air to Air Heat Exchangers. Some exceptions to UL Listing may apply. 4. The ERV core shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of ten years from the date of purchase. The balance-of-unit shall be warranted to be free of manufacturing defects and to retain its functional characteristics, under circumstances of normal use, for a period of two years from the date of purchase. Part II – Performance A. Energy Transfer The ERV shall be capable of transferring both sensible and latent energy between airstreams. Latent energy transfer shall be accomplished by direct water vapor transfer from one airstream to the other, without exposing transfer media in succeeding cycles directly to the exhaust air and then to the fresh air. B. Passive Frost Control The ERV core shall perform without condensing or frosting under normal operating conditions (defined as outside temperatures above -10°F and inside relative humidity below 40%). Occasional more extreme conditions shall not affect the usual function, performance or durability of the core. No condensate drains will be allowed. C. Continuous Ventilation Unit shall have the capacity to operate continuously without the need for bypass, recirculation, pre-heaters or defrost cycles under normal operating conditions. D. Positive Airstream Separation Water vapor transfer shall be through molecular transport by hydroscopic resin and shall not be accomplished by “porous plate” mechanisms. Exhaust and fresh airstreams shall travel at all times in separate passages, and airstreams shall not mix. E. Laminar Flow Airflow through the ERV core shall be laminar over the products entire operating airflow range, avoiding deposition of particulates on the interior of the energy exchange plate material. Part III – Product A. Construction 1. The energy recovery component shall be of fixed-plate cross-flow construction, with no moving parts. 2. No condensate drain pans or drains shall be allowed and unit shall be capable of operating in both winter and summer conditions without generating condensate. 3. The unit case shall be constructed of G90 galvanized, 20-gauge steel, with lapped corners and zinc plated screw fasteners. 4. Access doors shall provide easy access to blowers, ERV cores, and filters. Doors shall have an airtight compression seal using closed cell foam gaskets. Pressure taps, with captive plugs, shall be provided allowing cross-core pressure measurement allowing for accurate airflow measurement. 5. Case walls and doors shall be insulated with 1 inch, 4 pound density, foil/scrim faced, high-density fiberglass board insulation, providing a cleanable surface and eliminating the possibility of exposing the fresh air to glass fibers, and with minimum R-value of 4.3 (hr·ft2·°F/BTU). 6. The ERV cores shall be protected by a MERV-8 rated, 2” nominal, pleated, disposable filter in both airstreams. 7. Unit shall have single-point power connection and a single-point 24 VAC contactor control connection. 8. Blower motors shall be Premium Efficiency, EISA compliant for energy efficiency. The blower motors shall be totally enclosed (TEFC) and shall be supplied with factory installed motor starters. Direct drive models (EV450) shall be EISA- compliant for energy efficiency with open drip proof design and integral thermal protection. 9. Blowers shall be quiet running, forward curve type and be either direct drive (EV450 and HE1X only) or belt drive. HE1.5X shall be backward incline, motorized impeller type packages. HE6X and HE8X units use backward incline, belt drive blower packages. Belt drive motors shall be provided with adjustable pulleys and motor mounts allowing for blower speed adjustment, proper motor shaft orientation and proper belt tensioning. 10. The unit electrical box shall include a factory installed, non-fused disconnect switch and a 24 VAC, Class II transformer/relay package. 11. The ERV shall be provided “inverter-ready” allowing for applications of inverters supplied and installed by others. 12. Provide ECM controlled motors (available for EV450IN, HE1XIN and HE1.5XIN models) allowing for to preset speeds or variable speed operation with a 0- 10 volt DC control signal. Part IV – Installation A. Unit Location 1. Locate and orient unit to provide the shortest and most straight duct connections. Provide service clearances as indicated on the plans. Locate units distant from sound critical occupancies. 2. Provide a structurally suitable support for the base of any wall mounted or hung units. B. Vibration Isolation 1. Provide rubber or spring type isolators appropriately sized for corner weights of the specific unit. 2. Provide flexible duct connections at unit duct flanges. C. Duct Design 1. All ductwork shall be designed, constructed, supported and sealed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and pressure classifications. 2. At a minimum all duct runs to the outdoors shall be thermally insulated at levels appropriate to the local climate. A continuous vapor barrier shall also be provided on warm surface of the insulation. D. Test and Balancing 1. Test and Balancing may not begin until 100% of the installation is complete and fully functional. 2. Follow National Comfort Institute (NCI) air test and balance procedures specific to Heat Recovery Ventilator Balancing Procedure including standard reports to the owner’s representative. Radiant Panels The contractor shall supply and install CeramiCircuit™ infrared cove mounted heating panels (or approved equal), manufactured by Radiant Electric Heat, Inc., of the wattage and voltage specified on the plan. The heater shall be designed to provide maximum radiant heating energy output. Heater elements are to be constructed of ceramic coated 18 gauge steel plates with an energizing circuit on the internal face of the heating element. Heater body shall be a 20 gauge galvanized steel construct with ventilation slots at perimeter and 20 gauge steel bezel with high temperature powder coating. Heater shall have a junction box of approximately 6.75 inches on the back side of the heater body. There shall be three 7/8” standard knockouts in the junction box to allow entry of power feed. Actual power connections to the element and heater grounding connection shall be at the left end of the heater. Heater elements shall have a wattage density of a minimum of 2.3 watts/square inch of emissive surface area. Contractor shall install manufacturers supplied powder coated mounting brackets (2) as specified on the plan, and finish with supplied panel end trim pieces (2). Heaters shall be rated at 1000 watts (Model 945) at 240 volts. Scale: N.T.S. 6 LAVATORY MIXING VALVE DETAIL Scale: N.T.S. 4 VENT THROUGH ROOF DETAIL Scale: NTS 5 PIPE WALL PENETRATION Scale: n.t.s. 3 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATIOR DETAIL 0 A109 ADA-2 A110 CHASE A111 TOILET 1 A112 TOILET 3 A114 TOILET 2 A113 2" V UP TO 3" VTR 3"W 3"W 1 1/2"V L-1 WC-2 FD-1 L-1 WC-2 FD-1 FD-1 L-1 WC-1 FD-1 L-1 WC-1 L-1 WC-1 FD-1 4"W GCO-1 3"W 3"W 4"W 1 1/2"V WCO-1 CO-1 CO-1 MIN 1/8"/FT SLOPE TO SEWER MAIN CONNECTION FIELD VERIFY (E) SEWER SERVICE LOCATION, SIZE AND DEPTH BEFORE CONNECTING SEWER SERVICE PIPING 6FT MIN BELOW GRADE. (APPROX 78.00 FT SITE ELEVATION) MSB-1 4"W ADA 1 A109 ADA-2 A110 CHASE A111 TOILET 1 A112 TOILET 3 A114 TOILET 2 A113 WC-2 L-1 WC-2 L-1 WC-1 L-1 WC-1 L-1 WC-1 L-1 MSB-1 WATER METER TO BE PROVIDED BY UTILITY BFP-1 2"CW 2"CW 2"CW 2"CW 1 1/2"CW 2"CW 2"CW 1 1/2"CW 1 1/2"CW WHA-1 2"CW 1"HW WATER ENTRY PIPING 5FT MIN BELOW GRADE. (APPROX 79.00 FT SITE ELEVATION) EWH-1 M FIELD VERIFY (E) WATER SERVICE LOCATION, SIZE AND DEPTH BEFORE CONNECTING 10 10 10 10 10 WH-1 WH-1 WH-1 WH-1 WH-1 TMV-1 11 LEVEL 1 100' - 0" TOP OF WALL 108' - 8" EXHAUST FROM RR OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE EXHAUST TO OUTSIDE SUPPLY TO BUILDING ERV 1 3" VTR - PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 3/4/2016 2:59:51 PM MP1.1 12-31.34 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO 03/04/2016 Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" MECHANICAL PLAN Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" PLUMBING DWV PLAN Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" DOMESTIC PLUMBING PLAN NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 03/04/16 KEYNOTES # 1. INSTALL RADIANT PANEL AT CEILING HEIGHT PARALLEL TO FLOOR. PROVIDE HEAVY-DUTY 400+ LB HANGING RATED METAL GRATE COVERING OVER PANEL FOR VANDAL RESISTANCE. SEE SCHEDULE. 2. INSTALL ALL SIDEWALL GRILLES HIGH ON WALL. BALANCE TO CFM INDICATED. SEE DETAILS AND SCHEDULE. 3. NEW ERV. INSTALL HIGH IN ROOM AND MAINTAIN ALL MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE CLEARANCES. ADJUST ECM MOTOR TO PROVIDE REQUIRED AIRFLOW RATE AS INDICATED. ERV SHALL BE CONTROLLED VIA OCCUPANCY SENSORS AND TIMER, SEE ELECTRICAL PLANS FOR OCCUPANCY SENSOR PLACEMENT. SEE SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS. SEE DETAILS AND SCHEDULE. 4. PROVIDE WALL CAP FOR EXHAUST AIR DISCHARGE AT WALL. PROVIDE WITH BIRDSCREEN AND BACKDRAFT DAMPER. SEAL PENETRATION WATER TIGHT. 5. PROVIDE WALL CAP FOR OUTSIDE AIR SUPPLY INTAKE AT WALL. PROVIDE WITH BIRDSCREEN. SEAL PENETRATION WATER TIGHT. 6. SUPPLY AIR TO SPACE FROM ERV BELOW EA DUCT. SEE CROSS SECTION. 7. NEW THERMOSTAT SIMILAR TO SCHWANK TRUTEMP IR THERMOSTAT. MUST HAVE A TEMPERATURE RANGE INCLUDING 40 DEGREES FARENHEIT. MUST BE COMPATIBLE WITH RADIANT HEATING. MOUNT ON CEILING MIN 4' AWAY FROM RADIATIVE HEATERS IN ROOM. PROVIDE WITH TAMPER RESISTANT SCREWS FOR INSTALLATION. 8. INSTALL RADIANT PANEL IN EQUIPMENT ROOM JUST BELOW DUCTWORK TO ENSURE HEATING OF PLUMBING EQUIPMENT IN THE AREA. VANDAL RESISTANCE NOT REQUIRE FOR TWO (2) PANELS IN THE EQUIPMENT ROOM. 9. NEW TIMER SIMILAR TO RENEWAIRE TC7D-W MOUNTED ON WALL. TIMER SHALL BE USED TO CONTROL ERV. 10. L-1 TIME TROL SYSTEM (MVC2) COMPONENTS LOCATED IN CHASE, NOT UNDER SINK. 11. ROUTE DOMESTIC PIPING UNDER ELECTRICAL PANEL. 0 2' 4' 8' NORTH PLAN 0 2' 4' 8' NORTH PLAN 0 2' 4' 8' NORTH PLAN Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" 4 ERV AND DUCTWORK CROSS SECTION 0 2' 4' 8' SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS ERV SHALL RUN WHEN OCCUPANCY IS DETECTED BY OCCUPANCY SENSOR AND CONTINUE CYCLING AIR FOR 10 MINUTES (ADJ.) AFTER NO OCCUPANCY IS DETECTED IN ANY SPACE. TIMER SHALL BE SET TO TURN OFF ERV AND PREVENT ACTIVATION BASED ON OCCUPANCY DETECTION BETWEEN HOURS OF 10 PM AND 5 AM (ADJ.). RADIANT HEATERS SHALL CYCLE ON/OFF TO MAINTAIN THERMOSTAT TEMPERATURE OF 40 DEGREES FARENHEIT (ADJ.). 0 2' 4' 8' NORTH PLAN Scale: 1/4" = 1'-0" ROOF 0 RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL OTHER PIPING. COORDINATE ROUTING OF PIPING WITH ALL OTHER TRADES AND STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS TO AVOID ANY CONFLICTS. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 3'-0" IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL PANELS AND 1'-0" EITHER SIDE FROM STRUCTURE TO STRUCTURE AND FLOOR TO STRUCTURE ROUTE PIPING AROUND AND NOT DIRECTLY ABOVE ELECTRICAL PANELS. VERIFY CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLING PIPE. INCLUDE IN BID, ALL LICENSE, PERMIT, INSPECTION AND OTHER FEES REQUIRED BY UTILITY COMPANIES OR AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION REQUIRED FOR COMPLETION OF WORK SO THAT NO UNEXPECTED ADDITIONAL EXPENSES ARE INTRODUCED TO OWNER. PROMPTLY INFORM THE ENGINEER, IN WRITING, OF ANY DEVIATIONS IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FROM REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITIES, MUNICIPALITIES, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS AND REGULATIONS. PERFORM THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH SUCH REQUIREMENTS AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT, ETC. REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE AND FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM AS SPECIFIED AND INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. ALL CLEANOUTS, VALVES, AIR CHAMBERS, ETC. ARE TO BE ACCESSIBLE. EXTEND PIPING AND PROVIDE ACCESS PANELS AS NECESSARY. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO DEMONSTRATE ACCESSIBILITY IF IT IS QUESTIONABLE. ACCESS PANEL SIZES, LOCATIONS, AND FINAL COLOR SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE ARCHITECT AS WELL AS ALL OTHER TRADES TO AVOID ANY CONFLICTS. ACCESS PANELS PROVIDED BY PLUMBING CONTRACTOR FOR INSTALLATION BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. DURING CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES, THE ENTIRE WORK AREA SHALL BE CLEAN OF ALL DUST, DIRT AND OTHER DEBRIS BEFORE APPLICATION OF ANY NEW MATERIALS. ALL VALVES IN CORRIDORS SHALL BE LOCATED 1'-0" AWAY FROM WALLS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. VALVES SHALL NOT BE LOCATED OVER INACCESSIBLE CEILINGS UNLESS ADEQUATE ACCESS IS PROVIDED. FURNISH AND INSTALL BALL TYPE SHUTOFF VALVES IN ALL DOMESTIC WATER BRANCH PIPING OFF OF THE MAINS, RISERS, AND IN ALL BRANCH PIPING TO EACH SEPARATE ROOM TO PERMIT WATER SUPPLY SHUT OFF WITHOUT INTERFERING WITH ANY OTHER ROOM OR PORTION OF BUILDING. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SHALL BE SLOPED AT 1/8-INCH PER FOOT MINIMUM FOR ALL PIPING 4-INCH AND LARGER AND AT 1/4-INCH PER FOOT MINIMUM FOR ALL PIPING 3-INCH AND SMALLER. INDIRECT WASTE FROM FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES, AND EQUIPMENT DRAIN LINES TERMINATING AT FLOOR DRAINS, OR APPROVED RECEPTACLES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM 2" AIR GAP. SUPPORT PIPING SO INDIRECT WASTE CANNOT BE DEFLECTED FROM DRAIN OPENING. ALL VENTS FROM HORIZONTAL SOIL OR WASTE PIPE SHALL COME OFF TOP OR AT 45 DEGREE VERTICALLY FROM CENTER OF PIPE BEFORE OFFSETTING HORIZONTALLY TO RISER. ALL VENT TERMINATIONS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH BUILDING OPENINGS, AIR INTAKES AND AIR EXHAUST OPENINGS. ADJUST VENT THROUGH ROOF LOCATIONS TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODE AND TO BE IN THE LEAST VISIBLE EXTERIOR VIEWPOINT. SUPPORT ALL NEW PIPING AND EQUIPMENT FROM STRUCTURE ABOVE AS REQUIRED. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL TO SPAN BETWEEN PRIMARY BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COMPLETE DESIGN OF SUPPLEMENTAL STEEL AND PIPE SUPPORTS, INCLUDING REACTION LOADS TO PRIMARY BUILDING STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL NAIL PLATES WHERE PIPING PASSES THROUGH STUD(S) WITHIN 2" OF NAILING SURFACE TO PROTECT PIPE FROM NAILS OR DRYWALL SCREWS. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL APPROVED WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS IN WATER LINES, BOTH HOT AND COLD, SERVING BATTERY AND BACK TO BACK FIXTURE INSTALLATIONS IN PIPE SPACE AND PIPE CHASES AND SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL HOT WATER DISTRIBUTION LOOP AND BRANCH SUPPLY PIPING AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO THE HOT WATER INLET SIDE OF POINT OF USE THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE, INCLUDING FIXTURES WITH INTEGRAL MIXING VALVES, SO THAT THERE IS NO MORE THAN 10 LINEAR FEET DISTANCE. THIS SHALL BE IN SINGLE FIXTURE APPLICATIONS. IN MULTIPLE FIXTURE APPLICATIONS BATTERIED IN WALL OR PIPE CHASES, THE HOT WATER SUPPLY PIPING SHALL BE AS CLOSE AS REASONABLY POSSIBLE TO THE FIXTURE CONNECTIONS. ALL P-TRAPS FOR FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS SHALL BE DEEP SEAL TRAP FILLED WITH VEGETABLE OIL. 2" TRAPS SHALL HAVE A 4" MINIMUM WATER SEAL, 3" AND LARGER SHALL HAVE A 5" WATER SEAL. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL, TEST, AND FIELD BALANCE APPROVED EQUIPMENT PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. HOT WATER RECIRCULATION PIPING VENT PIPING (V) COLD WATER PIPING (CW) HOT WATER PIPING RPZ BACKFLOW PREVENTER FLOW ARROW WALL CLEANOUT WATER CLOSET VENT THRU ROOF VACUUM BREAKER THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE TO BELOW PLUMBING SUBCONTRACTOR MOP SINK BASIN LAVATORY HIGH AS POSSIBLE GENERAL CONTRACTOR FLOOR CLEANOUT FURNISHED BY OTHERS EXTERIOR CLEANOUT ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR BELOW GRADE BELOW FLOOR ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ABOVE CEILING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION AC AFF BF BG EC ECO FBO FCO GC HAP L MSB PC TB TMV VB VTR WC WCO FD FLOOR DRAIN L1 FA FROM ABOVE FB FROM BELOW TFB TO FLOOR BELOW TFA TO FLOOR ABOVE EWH ELECTRIC WATER HEATER SS SERVICE SINK PIPING (SOLID LINE) PLUMBING SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS ARE USED ON THIS PROJECT BAS BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM BFP BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICE BJ BETWEEN JOISTS BOP BOTTOM OF PIPE BTUH BRITISH THERMAL UNITS PER HOUR COND CONDENSATE CP CONDENSATE PUMP DN DOWN GPM GALLONS PER MINUTE MBH THOUSANDS OF BTU PER HOUR PRV PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE RPZ REDUCED PRESSURE BFP TOP TOP OF PIPE NTS NOT TO SCALE Annotation Abbreviations Annotation Symbology S.F. SQUARE FOOT Plumbing Symbology PLUMBING KEYED NOTE EQUIPMENT KEYED NOTE DETAIL OR SECTION MARK SHOWN ON DRAWING DETAIL MODULE NUMBER NEW BOLD TEXT INDICATES NEW ITEM 3 P1.1 11 22 WALL CLEANOUT SUSPENDED CLEANOUT (CO) WCO FLOOR DRAIN - ROUND FLOOR CLEANOUT - ROUND PIPE CAP PIPE TURNING DOWN PIPE TURNING UP TEE UP TEE DOWN DROP AND RUN DROP AND TURN TEE OFF TOP TEE OFF BOTTOM CROSS AND RISER PLAN 90° ELBOW PIPE TEE M WATER METER HW HWC CW V W WASTE (SANITARY) CD CONDENSATE DRAIN MC MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR Annotation Abbreviations Annotation Symbology Ventilation Symbology General Heating, Ventilation, and Air-conditioning Notes Common Requirements Design Conditions Ductwork Requirements S1 12x12 250 EQUIPMENT TYPE EQUIPMENT MARK SHOWN ON DRAWING DETAIL MODULE NUMBER AIRFLOW IN CFM THROAT SIZE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TAG AIR TERMINAL DESIGNATION KEYED NOTE DETAIL OR SECTION MARK AHU 1 3 M1.1 3 AHU-1 GUARD LOCKABLE GUARD WHERE INDICATED EQUIPMENT TO BE CONTROLLED THERMOSTAT SUPPLY AIR DUCT TOWARDS SUPPLY AIR DUCT AWAY EXHAUST / RETURN AIR DUCT TOWARDS EXHAUST / RETURN AIR DUCT AWAY T THIS FACILITY HAS BEEN DESIGNATED A "SMOKE-FREE" ENVIRONMENT. NO MECHANICAL VENTILATION PROVISIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO ACCOMMODATE TOBACCO USAGE BY THE BUILDING OCCUPANTS ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS SHALL BE INSTALLED TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE LOCAL CODE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION EVERY ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO COORDINATE THE ROUTING OF DUCTWORK WITHIN THE SPACE. ACTUAL LOCATION OF TRUSS WEBS HOWEVER CAN NOT BE DETERMINED UNTIL FABRICATION DRAWINGS ARE SUBMITTED FOR REVIEW. WHERE POSSIBLE, REFRAIN FROM PREFABRICATING DUCTWORK DESIGNATED FOR INSTALLATION WITHIN THE ATTIC UNTIL ROOF FRAMING IS IN PLACE AND ACTUAL STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS CAN BE FIELD VERIFIED. INSTALL EQUIPMENT TO ALLOW MAXIMUM POSSIBLE HEADROOM UNLESS SPECIFIC MOUNTING HEIGHTS ARE INDICATED INSTALL EQUIPMENT LEVEL AND PLUMB, PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO OTHER BUILDING SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS IN EXPOSED INTERIOR SPACES, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED INSTALL HVAC EQUIPMENT TO FACILITATE SERVICE, MAINTENANCE, AND REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF COMPONENTS. CONNECT EQUIPMENT FOR EASE OF REMOVAL, WITH MINIMUM INTERFERENCE TO OTHER INSTALLATIONS AIR FILTERS SHALL BE REPLACED IN ALL AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT EMPLOYING SUCH PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION AND OWNER OCCUPANCY THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ASSUMES FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PUT INTO OPERATION PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF A WORKING CONTROL SYSTEM, TESTING, AND BALANCING, AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. ALL RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCT OPENINGS SHALL BE COVERED WITH ROLL TYPE FILTER MEDIA DURING SUCH TEMPORARY OPERATION. OPERATION OF THE MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION SHALL NOT IMPACT THE EQUIPMENT WARRANTY. MINIMUM 1-YEAR FROM SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE PROVIDE FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION BETWEEN MOTOR DRIVEN MECHANICAL UNITS AND SHEET METAL SUPPLY, OUTDOOR AIR, EXHAUST, AND/OR RETURN AIR DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS BASIS OF DESIGN MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IS AS SCHEDULED ON THE DRAWINGS. INSTALLING CONTRACTOR ASSUMES RESPONSIBILITY FOR COORDINATING PHYSICAL SPACE REQUIREMENTS OF EQUIVALENT CAPACITY MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DEEMED ACCEPTABLE BY THE ENGINEER MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FACTORY FINISH DAMAGED DURING THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION SHALL BE RESTORED TO ORIGINAL CONDITION PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE DUCTWORK IS SHOWN IN SCHEMATIC FORM. ALL REQUIRED DUCT RISERS AND DROPS TO ALLOW GENERAL ROUTING DEPICTED MAY NOT BE SHOWN. PROVIDE OFFSETS AS REQUIRED TO MEET SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER TRADES AND FIELD CONDITIONS. EXACT LOCATION OF THE DUCTWORK MAY VARY ACCORDING TO THE COORDINATED SPACE REQUIREMENTS. EACH TRADE SHALL BE TOTALLY RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. NOTIFY ENGINEER OF CONDITIONS REPRESENTING SIGNIFICANT CHANGES TO THE DESIGNED ROUTING COMPLY WITH NFPA 90A, "INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SYSTEMS," UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED COMPLY WITH NFPA 90B, "INSTALLATION OF WARM AIR HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS," UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED FABRICATE RECTANGULAR DUCTS, ELBOWS, TRANSITIONS, OFFSETS, BRANCH CONNECTIONS, AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WITH GALVANIZED, SHEET STEEL, ACCORDING TO SMACNA'S "HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS--METAL AND FLEXIBLE." COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL THICKNESS, REINFORCING TYPES AND INTERVALS, TIE-ROD APPLICATIONS, AND JOINT TYPES AND INTERVALS COORDINATE SIZE, QUANTITY, AND LOCATION OF ALL OPENINGS REQUIRED FOR DUCT AND PIPE PENETRATIONS THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS, AND ROOFS, WITH CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR ROUGH FRAMING. COORDINATE LOCATION OF AIR INTAKES WITH EXHAUST AND PLUMBING VENTS SO THAT INTAKES ARE A MINIMUM OF 10 FEET FROM EXHAUST OPENINGS OR PLUMBING VENTS INSTALL DUCTS IN SHORTEST LENGTH POSSIBLE AND FEWEST POSSIBLE JOINTS. INSTALL FABRICATED FITTINGS FOR CHANGES IN DIRECTIONS, CHANGES IN SIZE AND SHAPE, AND CONNECTIONS INSTALL DUCTS, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, VERTICALLY AND HORIZONTALLY, PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR TO BUILDING LINES; AVOID DIAGONAL RUNS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ON DRAWINGS REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR EXACT LOCATION OF CEILING MOUNTED DEVICES. COORDINATE MECHANICAL CEILING DEVICES SUCH AS DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS WITH LIGHT FIXTURES, SPEAKERS, SPRINKLER HEADS, ETC. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPACES: ROUTE DUCTWORK TO AVOID PASSING THROUGH TRANSFORMER VAULTS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SPACES AND ENCLOSURES. AVOID ROUTING DUCTWORK DIRECTLY ABOVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED ON THE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS NON-FIRE-RATED PARTITION PENETRATIONS: WHERE DUCTS PASS THROUGH INTERIOR PARTITIONS AND ARE EXPOSED TO VIEW IN MECHANICAL ROOMS, CONCEAL SPACE BETWEEN CONSTRUCTION OPENING AND DUCT OR DUCT INSULATION WITH SHEET METAL FLANGES OF SAME METAL THICKNESS AS DUCT. OVERLAP OPENING ON FOUR SIDES BY AT LEAST 1-1/2 INCHES UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE FIRE-RATED PARTITION PENETRATIONS: WHERE DUCTS PASS THROUGH INTERIOR PARTITIONS, INSTALL APPROPRIATELY RATED FIRE DAMPER. FIRE DAMPER INSTALLATION MUST STRICTLY ADHERE TO MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDE MANUAL VOLUME-CONTROL BALANCING DAMPER AT ALL BRANCH DUCTS AND AT ALL OTHER LOCATIONS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND BALANCEABLE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM BALANCE ENTIRE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM TO AIRFLOW QUANTITIES INDICATED ON MECHANICAL DRAWINGS HVAC DESIGN LOAD CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE FOLLOWING CLIMATE DATA: CITY AND STATE: FORT COLLINS, COLORADO WINTER OUTDOOR AMBIENT DB/WB: -3.0/-4.6 SUMMER OUTDOOR AMBIENT DB/WB: 93/60 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN DESIGNED BASED UPON THE 2012 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE, 2012 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE, NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION (NFPA) STANDARDS, AND ACCEPTED AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATION, AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS (ASHRAE) ACCEPTED STANDARDS AND PRACTICES Mechanical Equipment Installation EH EXHAUST HOOD SUPPLY AIR IH INTAKE HOOD ERV ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATOR SA OA OUTDOOR AIR EA EXHAUST AIR RP RADIANT PANEL MECHANICAL SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS NOTE: NOT ALL SYMBOLS ARE USED ON THIS PROJECT - PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 3/4/2016 2:59:51 PM MP1.0 12-31.34 LEGEND SHEET OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO 03/04/2016 NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 0 03/04/16 07 62 00.A9 FLEXIBLE FLASHING 06 10 00.B4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING 05 40 00.C1 LIGHT GAUGE ANGLE 2‐1/2" x 2‐1/2" x 12 GA 2"L ‐ 2'‐0" O.C. MAX SPACING WRAP BLOCKING AND CONTINUE BEHIND SPRAY FOAM INSULATION 07 92 00.A5 SEALANT, BOTH SIDES 05 50 00.A1 STEEL LOOSE LINTEL 04 20 00.C2 WEEPS 06 10 00.A5 PLYWOOD SHEATHING 04 20 00.A0 FACING BRICK 8" 04 01 20.C6 04 20 00.D4 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL THRU‐WALL FLASHING GROUT FILLED FRAME MASONRY WALL BELOW 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW BRAKE METAL, FULL HEIGHT OF WALL B MASONRY WALL BELOW MULLION‐ ALIGN CENTERLINE WITH CENTERLINE OF WALL 03 45 00.A1 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL LEVEL 1 100'‐0" FOUNDATION PLAN 97'‐6" 1 8" 04 01 20.D3 GROUT SOLID 07 21 00.B7 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION 04 20 00.D4 THRU‐WALL FLASHING 04 20 00.C6 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL 04 01 20.C2 WEEPS 03 30 00.B4 EXPANSION JOINT 03 30 00.D1 VAPOR BARRIER 1'‐0 3/8" 3 5/8" XB 04 20 00.D5 TERMINATION BAR W/ SEALANT AT TOP 07 21 00.B4 2" FOAM PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION LEVEL 1 100'‐0" 2 08 71 00.A1 SADDLE THRESHOLD 1/2" POLYSTYRENE INSULATION EXPANSION JOINT 07 21 00.B4 2" FOAM PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION STAINLESS STEEL DOOR FOUNDATION WALL. RE: STRUCTURAL VAPOR BARRIER A 3" 3 7/8" 03 45 00.A1 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW 07 92 00.A5 SEALANT, BOTH SIDES 08 41 13.B4 MINIMALLY EXPANDING SPRAY FOAM INSULATION 07 62 00.A9 FLEXIBLE FLASHING CONTINUE BEHIND SPRAY FOAM INSULATION 06 10 00.B4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING 07 21 00.B7 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION 07 62 00.A8 STAINLESS STEEL BRAKE METAL BULLNOSE 05 40 00.C1 LIGHT GAUGE ANGLE 2‐1/2" X 2‐1/2" X 12 GA 2" L ‐ 2'‐0" O.C. MAX SPACING STAINLESS STEEL SILL BELOW 9/32" 3/4" COMPRESSIBLE FILLER 6" 4 OD X .120 WALL ROUND STEEL TUBE DOWNSPOUT ‐ PAINT. PT‐3 RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE‐ ALIGN WITH EXTERIOR FACE OF MASONRY 06 10 00.B4 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD BLOCKING 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW WRAP BLOCKING 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT 08 41 13.B4 MINIMALLY EXPANDING SPRAY FOAM INSULATION 07 21 00.B7 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION 07 62 00.A10 DETAIL FLASHING BRAKE METAL TO MATCH ALUMINUM LIGHT FIXTURE. ADHERE TO WOOD BLOCKING. BOTH SIDES. 1 A 03 45 00.A1 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL STAINLESS STEEL BRAKE METAL SILL BELOW CMU BELOW 05 12 00.A1 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW 3 5/8" 5 1/2" 3 7/8" 3" BELOW PREFORMED STRUCTURAL MULLIION AT CORNER, BY WINDOW MANUFACTURER 3" 3 7/8" 5 1/2" 3 5/8" PAINT PRECAST JOINT ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:17:21 AM A561 12‐31.34 DOOR SCHEDULE, OPENING DETAILS, FRAME TYPES OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 NO DESCRIPTION DATE DOOR SCHEDULE ROOM MARK DOOR FRAME DETAIL WIDTH HEIGHT COMMENTS PANEL MATERIAL TYPE TYPE MATERIAL HEAD JAMB THRESH TOILET 4 A109 3'‐0" 7'‐0" ST STEEL 2 F ST STEEL C4/A561 C3/A561 A2/A561 TOILET 5 A110 3'‐0" 7'‐0" ST STEEL 2 F ST STEEL C4/A561 C3/A561 A2/A561 CHASE A111 3'‐0" 7'‐0" ST STEEL 2 F ST STEEL C4/A561 C3/A561 A2/A561 TOILET 1 A112 3'‐0" 7'‐0" ST STEEL 2 F ST STEEL C4/A561 C3/A561 A2/A561 TOILET 2 A113 3'‐0" 7'‐0" ST STEEL 2 F ST STEEL C4/A561 C3/A561 A2/A561 TOILET 3 A114 3'‐0" 7'‐0" ST STEEL 2 F ST STEEL C4/A561 C3/A561 A2/A561 1/4" = 1'-0" DOOR PANEL TYPES 1/4" = 1'-0" DOOR PANEL TYPES C3 DOOR 1 1/2" = 1'-0" JAMB W1 W2 W3 W4 C4 DOOR 1 1/2" = 1'-0" HEAD C1 PLAN 3" = 1'-0" DETAIL ‐ WALL @ GLAZING A1 BASE 1 1/2" = 1'-OF 0" WALL A2 SECTION 1 1/2" = 1'-0" ‐ FOUNDATION C2 GLAZING 1 1/2" = 1'-0" JAMB A4 CJ 3" = @ 1'-0" CORNER OF OPENING W/ LOOSE LINTEL A3 DOWNSPOUT 1 1/2" = 1'-0" BRACKET B3 GLAZING 3" = 1'-0" HEAD ANCHOR BRACKET TO BRICK, PROVIDE (2) BRACKETS WELD BRACKET TO PIPE B4 GLAZING 3" = 1'-0" @ CORNER 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE 2'‐4" SEAL PERIMETER WOOD FRAMING 1'‐3 23/32" T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" EQ EQ A30 A10 RADIANT PANEL HEATER & VANDAL RESISTANT COVER 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT 1" 2'‐2" EXPOSED PLYWOOD IN CHASE A111, CLEAR FINISH STRUCTURAL STEEL TOILET 1 A112 ONLY, TOILET 3 A114 AND TOILET 2 A113 TO BE 2'4" DEEP SEAL PERIMETER WOOD FRAMING R1 B 1 1/2" RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE 06 10 00.A6 PRESSURE TREATED PLYWOOD A561 B3 R1 TURNED DOWN AIR BARRIER BEHIND SPRAY FOAM PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL PT‐3 07 62 00.B3 GRAVEL STOP PRE‐FINISHED METAL, CONCEALED FASTENERS 3/4" ALUMINUM ANGLE 06 10 00.A2 WOOD BLOCKING PRESSURE TREATED 06 10 00.A6 PRESSURE TREATED PLYWOOD 07 54 23.A4 COVER BOARD 07 54 23.A1 TPO ROOFING T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" XB 3 1/4" 03 45 00.A1 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW WRAP BLOCKING BULLNOSE 04 20 00.B0 CMU 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT 08 41 13.B4 MINIMALLY EXPANDING SPRAY FOAM INSULATION IN SHIM SPACE 3 7/8" VENT 3/4" 07 62 00.A8 STAINLESS STEEL BRAKE METAL 2 3 5/8" 2'‐2 3/8" 5" 1" 1'‐4" XB 3/4" 1 1/2" 3/4" ALUMINUM 07 92 00.A1 ANGLE SEALANT 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE 06 10 00.A6 PRESSURE TREATED PLYWOOD PAINTED STRUCTRUAL STEEL PT‐3 07 25 00.A4 AIR BARRIER BEHIND SPRAY FOAM 05 40 00.A2 STRUCTURAL STEEL STUD 07 62 00.B3 GRAVEL STOP 6" PRE‐FINISHED METAL, CONCEALED FASTENERS VENT PROVIDE CLOSURE FOR SPRAY FOAM DOWNSPOUT STANDOFF BRACKET, ANCHOR TO BRICK 4 OD x .120 WALL ROUND STEEL TUBE DOWNSPOUT‐ PAINT STRUCTURAL STEEL FORM DOWNSPOUT WITH LEAD SHEET R1 MIN 6" FULLY ASHERED TPO FLASHING C3 BUILDING 1/2" = 1'-0" SECTION ‐ EAST/WEST C1 BUILDING 1/2" = 1'-0" SECTION ‐ NORTH/SOUTH ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:17:13 AM A301 12‐31.34 BUILDING SECTIONS & DETAILS OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 A4 CMU 1 1/2" = 1'-@ 0" ROOF A3 CMU 1 1/2" = 1'-@ 0" ROOF VALLEY B2 ROOF 1 1/2" = 1'-@ 0" NORTH‐SOUTH A2 SILL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A1 ROOF 1 1/2" = 1'-@ 0" EAST‐WEST A5 DOWNSPOUT 1 1/2" = 1'-0" PT‐1, EPOXY IN CHASE A111 NO DESCRIPTION DATE 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW PT‐1 10 28 00.A2 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER PT‐2 18" 6" MAX 12" MAX 34" SOAP DISPENSER HAND DRYER 42" 36" 41" 18" 41" 19" MAX 17" MIN MIN 12" 12" TOILET PAPER DISPENSER GRAB BAR GRAB BAR GRAB BAR T.O. GRAB BAR 36" MAX T.O. GRAB BAR 36" MAX TO OPERABLE PART 43" 30" A221 D5 D4 D3 D2 SLOPE TO DRAIN, TYP 1'‐6" PCONC ‐ ‐ 2'‐0" 2'‐8" 10 28 00.A2 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER 1'‐3" 1 A TOILET 5 A110 SCONC ‐ ‐ 10 28 00.B5 HAND DRYER 2'‐0" A1 A221 CHANGING BENCH AND STRAP CLEAR SEALER ON FLOOR SLOPE TO DRAIN, TYP PCONC ‐ ‐ 1'‐6" 1'‐1" A221 C6 C3 C4 B 2 TOILET 1 A112 A221 C5 A221 C2 1'‐0" 10 28 00.B5 HAND DRYER 2'‐2" 10 28 00.A2 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSER LEVEL 1 100'‐0" A LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 5" 2'‐10 1/2" 2'‐0" 04 20 00.B0 CMU 4" 3.5" X 3.5" X 1/4 " CONTINUOUS ANGLE. ANCHOR TO CMU WITH (3) EPOXY ANCHORS 10 28 00.D2 BABY CHANGING STRAP PT‐1 06 10 00.B3 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD BLOCKING 06 10 00.A5 PLYWOOD SHEATHING (2) LAYERS ‐ 3/4", FIRE RETARDANT 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT ALL EDGES 07 92 00.A1 SEALANT 08 54 13.A1 FIBERGLASS WINDOW 04 20 00.B0 CMU PT‐1 10 28 00.B5 HAND DRYER PT‐2 10 28 00.A6 SOAP DISPENSER ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:17:05 AM A221 12‐31.34 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 NO DESCRIPTION DATE D5 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 ‐ NORTH D4 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 5 ‐ EAST D3 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 5‐ SOUTH D2 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 5‐ WEST C6 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ‐ NORTH C2 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 & 3 ‐ EAST C4 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ‐ SOUTH C3 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ‐ WEST A2 TYPICAL 1/2" = 1'-0" MOUNTING HEIGHTS D1 ADA 1/2" = 1'-RESTROOMS 0" C1 NON‐ADA 1/2" = 1'-0" RESTROOM A1 SECTION 1 1/2" = 1'-0" ‐ BENCH C5 TOILET 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 ‐ EAST 1. EPOXY PAINT, ALL INTERIOR WALLS, TYPICAL GENERAL NOTES ‐ FINISHES FLAT ALUMINUM CUT‐OUT LETTERS ‐ PAINT BLACK, SECURE WITH ADHESIVE A2 A301 C2 A561 03 45 00.A1 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE PIPE BOLLARD 1'‐4" 1'‐4" 1'‐0" 1'‐0" 3'‐6" 1'‐6" CUT METAL PANEL SIGN ‐ SIM A4/A201 3" LOGO ‐ FLAT ALUMINUM CUT OUT LETTERS ‐ PAINT BLACK, SECURE WITH ADHESIVE LEVEL 1 100'‐0" C1 A301 T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" 2 1 04 20 00.A2 FACING BRICK‐2 10 14 00.A2 FLAT SIGN 04 20 00.A1 FACING BRICK‐1 PIPE BOLLARD 3" TYP C2 A561 CJ W3 PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL 07 62 00.B3 GRAVEL STOP A201 C1 TO BASE OF HIGHEST TACTILE CHARACTER 5'‐0" TYPE A 10 14 00.A2 FLAT SIGNTYPE A FLAT ALUMINUM CUT‐OUT LETTERS ‐ PAPINT BLACK, SECURE WITH ADHESIVE A2 A301 C1 A561 03 45 00.A1 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE B4 A561 4'‐0" 4'‐0" 6'‐10" 2'‐0" CUT METAL PANEL SIGN A201 A4 SIM LEVEL 1 100'‐0" C3 A301 T.O. MASONRY 108'‐8" A201 A4 SIM A B CUT METAL PANEL SIGNAGE 04 20 00.A2 FACING BRICK‐2 04 20 00.A1 FACING BRICK‐1 2'‐0" 1'‐4" PIPE BOLLARD PIPE BOLLARD C2 A561 07 62 00.B3 GRAVEL STOP PAINTED STRUCTURAL STEEL PT‐3 W4 A3 A561 A2 A301 4 OD X .120 WALL ROUND STEEL TUBE DOWNSPOUT ‐ PAINT 03 45 00.A1 PRECAST CONCRETE SILL B4 A561 LEVEL 1 100'‐0" 10" MATCH ROOF ANGLE CITY LOGO, ROUTED AND BACKED 3/8" THICK ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL WITH ROUTED LOGO AND SYMBOLS, ALL EDGES SMOOTH 3/4" ALUMINUM TAMPERPROOF STANDOFFS, TYPICAL OF 8 2'‐8" 1'‐0 5/8" 2'‐3 7/8" 8" 1'‐4" XB 04 20 00.B0 CMU 3 5/8" 2 1/4" 2 1/2" 7 5/8" 07 21 00.B7 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION XB1 BRICK TYPE 1 @ 8" CMU XB2 BRICK TYPE 2 @ 8" CMU XB3 BRICK TYPE 1 @ 12" CMU 04 20 00.A0 FACING BRICK AIR SPACE 1'‐4" A GROUT SOLID @ 'a' + a = ACOUSTIC WALL: A30, A31 ACHIEVE STC 55 A40, A41, ACHIEVE STC 65 + s = WALL TO RESIST THE PASSAGE OF SMOKE + r = RATED WALL: MEET UL ASSEMBLY U904 A20 A21 6" GFCMU A30 8" CMU A10 A11 4" GFCMU 6" CMU 4" CMU A31 8" GFCMU 7 5/8" 04 20 00.B0 CMU 3 5/8" 5 5/8" 07 92 00.A7 SEALANT AND BACKING MATERIAL BOTH SIDES 04 20 00.B0 CMU 04 20 00.C8 PREFORMED CONTROL JOINT 8" 8" 6" 5/8" 3/8" 3/8" PICTOGRAMS GRADE 2 BRAILLE TACTILE CHARACTERS 3/8" RADIUS CORNERS 8" 8" 3/8" 6" 5/8" 3/8" 3/8" TACTILE CHARACTERS GRADE 2 BRAILLE PICTOGRAM RADIUS CORNERS 5/8" 8" 3/8" 3/8" CITY LOGO TACTILE CHARACTERS GRADE 2 BRAILLE RADIUS CORNERS 8" 3/4" 3/4" 6" 3/4" R16.5 3" R12 2 1/2" 1/2" EST. PERFORMANCE ~R30 1'‐2 1/4" 07 54 23.A1 TPO ROOFING 06 10 00.A4 PLYWOOD DECKING 06 10 00.A5 PLYWOOD SHEATHING 05 40 00.A2 STRUCTURAL STEEL STUD 07 54 23.A4 COVER BOARD 07 54 23.A2 POLYISOCYANURATE INSULATION 07 54 23.A5 AIR BARRIER AT INTERIOR SPACE ONLY 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE R1 07 54 23.A3 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION ENGRAVED ALUMINUM FLAT PANEL W/ ETCHED LETTERS, BLACK FILL ‐ STUD MOUNTED, SILICON AROUND ALL EDGES. EXACT COPY TBD 2'‐0" 2'‐0" ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:59 AM A201 12‐31.34 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS, EXTERIOR DETIALS & WALL TYPES OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 B2 EAST 1/4" = 1'-0" ELEVATION A1 SOUTH 1/4" = 1'-0" ELEVATION NO DESCRIPTION DATE B1 NORTH 1/4" = 1'-0" ELEVATION A2 WEST 1/4" = 1'-0" ELEVATION A4 CUT 1" = 1'-0" METAL SIGNAGE PANEL WALL TYPES D4 CONTROL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" JOINT ‐ MASONRY WALL C1 SIGN 3" = 1'-0" TYPE A C2 SIGN 3" = 1'-0" TYPE B C3 SIGN 3" = 1'-0" TYPE C ROOF TYPES C4 SIGN‐INFORMATION 1 1/2" = 1'-0" CHASE A111 TOILET 1 A112 TOILET 2 A113 TOILET 3 A114 A30 A30 A30 A30 A30 A30 XB XB XB A221 C1 A221 D1 B 1 2 A TYP TYP 18'‐8" 4'‐11" 5'‐6" 5'‐7" XB XB STEEL PIPE BOLLARD STEEL PIPE BOLLARD 8" 1'‐4" 8" 1'‐4" 16'‐7 5/8" 1'‐0" 19'‐3 5/8" 1'‐0 3/8" A561 A3 BENCH "CASSIDY" 32 GALLON TRASH BIN W/ RAIN BONNET FIELD LOCATE WITH OWNER "CASSIDY" 32 GALLON TRASH BIN W/ RAIN BONNET FIELD LOCATE WITH OWNER A201 B2 A201 A1 C3 A301 C3 A301 C1 A301 C1 A301 A201 A2 6'‐5 1/4" 30'‐10 1/4" TO OUTSIDE FACE OF STEEL 3'‐1" 1'‐6" 1'‐6" B 1 2 A 21'‐8" 4" / 12" 2" / 12" FUTURE PV PANELS (NOT IN CONTRACT) A5 A301 14.00° RE: MECH RE: MECH C3 A301 C3 A301 C1 A301 C1 A301 B 1 2 A 4 OD X .120 WALL ROUND STEEL TUBE DOWNSPOUT ‐ PAINT 4 OD X .120 WALL ROUND STEEL TUBE DOWNSPOUT‐ PAINT A5 A301 1X6 T&G BEETLE KILL PINE WOOD SIDING. A5 A301 4" / 12" 2" / 12" EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ EQ 2'‐7" 2'‐7" RADIANT PANEL HEATER 06 20 23.A1 1X6 SQ T&G BEETLE KILL PINE LIGHT FIXTURE 109'‐10" 110'‐8" 109'‐10" 109'‐10" 110'‐8" 2" / 12" 2" / 12" 4" / 12" 4" / 12" 4" / 12" LINEAR PENDANT LIGHT LINEAR WALL‐MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURE UTILITY LIGHT FIXTURE RECESSED CAN LIGHT 1. ALL SLOPES IN SHADED AREAS ARE DEVELOPED WITH TAPERED INSULATION. 2. ALL WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE PRESERVATIVE TREATED. 3. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, EXHAUST FANS, AND SKYLIGHTS SHALL BE ON ROOF CURBS. ALL ROOF CURBS SHALL BE INSULATED AND THE VOID BENEATH ITEMS WITHIN THE CURB SPACE SHALL BE FILLED WITH INSULATION. 4. ALL CRICKETS ARE ANGLED 30 DEGREES MIN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. ALL CRICKET SLOPES ARE 3/8" PER 1'‐0" NET (3/4" PER 1'‐0" CRICKET ON 3/8" PER 1'‐0" ROOF EQUALS 3/8" PER 1'‐0" NET CRICKET SLOPE), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 6. ALL OBJECTS GREATER THAN 24" IN WIDTH ACROSS SLOPE SHALL HAVE CRICKETS TO DIVERT WATER AROUND THEM. 7. PROVIDE PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS AT ALL LAMB'S TONGUES AND DOWNSPOUTS ON ROOF AND AT GRADE. 8. INSTALL ROOF DRAIN LEADERS, FROM DRAIN ASSEMBLY TO DRAIN CHASE, AT MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ELEVATIONS WHILE MAINTAINING REQUIRED SLOPE. 9. ANYWHERE EXPOSED FASTENERS ARE USED IN THE ROOFING SYSTEM, COPING SYSTEM, EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEM, OR FLASHING SYSTEM, THEY SHALL UTILIZE SEALING WASHERS. C3 A301 C3 A301 C1 A301 C1 A301 W2 W4 W3 W1 A561 C1 B 1 2 A 2" / 12" 4" / 12" 2'‐0" 4'‐5 1/16" 16'‐8" 15'‐8" 4'‐11 5/8" 9 3/8" 15'‐4" 5'‐9" 9 3/8" 15'‐7 5/8" 2'‐0" A561 C2 3'‐8" 9 1/16" 2'‐2" A561 C1 SIM A561 C1 SIM SIGN PANEL SIGN PANEL RADIANT PANEL LIGHT FIXTURE LIGHT FIXTURE ALIGN A561 B4 ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:55 AM A101 12‐31.34 LEVEL ONE FLOOR PLAN, ROOF PLAN, REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & CLERESTORY PLAN OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 FLOOR PLAN ‐ LEGEND NO DESCRIPTION DATE A1 FLOOR 1/4" = 1'-0" PLAN A2 ROOF 1/4" = 1'-0" C1 REFLECTED 1/4" = 1'-0" CEILING PLAN LEGEND ‐ REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 6. SET FLOOR DRAINS 3/4" BELOW SURROUNDING TOP OF SLAB ELEVATION AND SLOPE FLOOR TO DRAINS, U.N.O. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL FLOOR DRAIN LOCATIONS AT TOILET ROOMS. 5. PROVIDE BLOCKING AT ALL ACCESSORIES (GRAB BARS, ETC.), HARDWARE WHERE REQUIRED, AND WALL HUNG CABINETS. 4. RE: WALL AND ROOF TYPE SHEET (A201) FOR WALL AND ROOF ASSEMBLIES. 3. INTERIOR DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF STUD, FACE OF MASONRY, OR FACE OF CONCRETE. WHERE DIMENSIONS ARE NOTED "CLEAR", DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISH FACE. 2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF DISCREPANCIES ARE DISCOVERED. 1. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS TO REVIEW ALL OF THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING ARCHITECTURAL, FOR WORK UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE CONTRACTS. NO EXTRAS WILL BE ALLOWED FOR WORK SHOWN IN ANY PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR DESCRIBED IN ANY PART OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. GENERAL NOTES ‐ PLAN 2. PAINT EXPOSED STRUCTURE, DUCT WORK, PIPING, AND CONDUIT IN OCCUPIED SPACES. 1. ALL CONDUIT TO CEILING MOUNTED FIXTURES SHALL BE LOCATED ABOVE ROOF DECK (BELOW INSULATION). RUN CONDUIT IN DECK FLUTES WHEREVER POSSIBLE. GENERAL NOTES ‐ REFLECTED CEILING PLAN N GENERAL NOTES: ROOF PLAN C2 REFLECTED 1/4" = 1'-0" CEILING PLAN ‐ CLERESTORY A. Basis‐of‐Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Bobrick Washroom Equipment (unless noted), or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bradley Corporation. 2. Bobrick Washroom Accessories 3. Approved Equal B. Grab Bars: B‐6806.99. 1. Satin stainless steel. 2. Peened grip. 3. Provide one 36 inch bar behind water closet; one 18 inch and one 42 inch bar beside water closet at toilets required to be ADA accessible, as shown on drawings. C. Soap Dispenser: B‐4063 1. Recessed D. Toilet Tissue Dispenser – Vandal Stop Products AS‐JRDx1 12 gauge – 304L stainless steel E. Hand Dryer – Xlerator XL‐SB 1. Noise reduction nozzle F. Strap Kit for Changing Table 1. Koala Kare Strap Kit and Hardware 2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 6. Tubular Specialties Manufacturing, Inc. B. Mop and Broom Holder: Bobrick B223 x 24 1. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 2. Length: 24 inches 3. Hooks: Three. 4. Mop/Broom Holders: three ‐ spring‐loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full‐length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion‐resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate power requirements for electric hand dryers with Division 26 Contractor. B. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. NO DESCRIPTION DATE 6. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. B. Workmanship shall be first class throughout or work will be subject to rejection and refinishing at no additional cost to Owner. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well‐ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. If woodwork, metal or any other surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding and puttying operations, notify General Contractor and Architect in writing or assume responsibility for any unsatisfactory resulting finish. D. Do not apply paint, stains or finishes in areas where dust is being generated or where rubbish has accumulated or is being removed. E. All painting of exterior and interior items requiring alkyd enamel and epoxy to be painted when building is unoccupied. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Diamond Vogel Paints. 2. Kwal Paint. 3. Sherwin‐Williams Company (The). 4. Approved Equal B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed in Part 3 Painting Schedules for the paint category indicated. C. City of Ft. Collins Standard color is Diamond Vogel “Acoustic White” – OW‐1, unless otherwise approved. (PT‐1) D. PT‐2: Diamond Vogel “Cheddar Cheese”0977 E. PT‐3: Sherwin Williams “Porpoise” SW7047 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc‐Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Low‐Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small‐Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Colors: indicated on drawings and in this specification section. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying 1. Paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface‐applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface‐applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Shop‐Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC‐PA 1 for touching up shop‐primed surfaces. H. Galvanized‐Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. J. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. K. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 4. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint all mechanical and electrical equipment, except that which is factory finished or aluminum, exposed to weather or to view on the roof and outdoors and including the following work, where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit (to match adjacent wall). f. Plastic conduit (to match adjacent wall). g. Tanks that do not have factory‐applied final finishes. 2. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. These items shall be spray painted in colors as directed by Architect (generally to match adjacent finished materials), and returned for installation. Touch up screws and scuffed spots, or repaint to achieve uniform finish. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets with flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers, grilles, or louvers. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. 5. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. 6. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: a. Items fully factory‐finished unless specifically noted; factory‐primed items are not considered factory‐finished. b. Items indicated to receive other finish. c. Items indicated to remain naturally finished. d. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of equipment. e. Anodized aluminum. f. Polished and brushed stainless steel items. g. Brick, precast concrete, integrally colored plaster. h. Concrete masonry in utility, mechanical, and electrical spaces unless noted to be painted. i. Polished and brushed stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead. j. Acoustical materials. k. Concealed piping, ductwork, and conduit. F. Ensure complete coverage of block filler such that pores and pinholes are filled. At Toilet Rooms and Food Preparation areas apply filler coats until completely smooth and acceptable to Health Department having jurisdiction. G. Paint entire wall where patching is to be painted and nearest horizontal break line, or ceiling, if none is existing. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metals, including areas on roof not visible from ground. First coat not required on items with prime coat applied by manufacturer. Two finish coats over primer. 1. Primer: Synthetic rust‐inhibiting primer, total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. a. D‐V: Vers‐Acryl 200 Acrylic Maintenance Primer/Finish. 2. First and Second Coats: Acrylic gloss alkyd enamel, total dry film thickness of not less than 3.7 mils. a. D‐V: Nu‐Cling Gloss Acrylic Enamel, MH Series. B. Zinc Coated Metals (Galvanized) including areas on roof not visible from ground. Gloss Enamel: Two finish coats over primer. 1. Treatment as described in Part 3, Preparation, for galvanized metal 2. Primer: Galvanized metal primer, total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. a. ICI: 4020 Devflex DTM Primer & Finish. b. Kwal: 5810 G‐Prime Universal Primer. c. Moore: Acrylic Metal Primer M04. d. Pittsburgh: Pitt‐Tech DTM 90‐712. e. S‐W: Pro‐Cryl (B66‐310). f. D‐V: Vers‐Acryl 200 Acrylic Maintenance Primer/Finish. 3. First and Second Coats: Acrylic gloss enamel, total dry film thickness not less than 2.6 mils. a. ICI: 4208 Devflex Acrylic Gloss Enamel. b. Kwal: 8300 Acrylic Gloss DTM Enamel. c. Moore: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. d. Pittsburgh: Speedhide 6‐8534. e. S‐W: DTM (B66‐100). f. D‐V: Nu‐Cling Gloss Acrylic Enamel, MH Series. C. Plywood/T&G wood: 1. Primer: Latex based, total dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. a. ICI: 2010 U‐H Durus. b. Kwal: 5862 Embassy Primer c. Moore: Super Spec Primer 169. d. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Primer 6‐609 e. S‐W: B42W41 Primer. f. D‐V: Sure Grip Acrylic Primer, BU‐1501. 2. First and Second Coats: Flat, exterior acrylic latex, total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. a. ICI: 2210 U‐H Durus. b. Kwal: 6400 Ambassador. c. Moore: Super Spec Flat 183. d. Pittsburgh: Pro Siding Plus 57‐110. e. S‐W: A100 Flat ‐ A80 Series. f. D‐V: Weather Plate Exterior Latex Flat, BF Series. D. Exterior Structural Steel (Not Galvanized): 1. Shop Primed by 051200 Contractor, not less than 3.0 mils: a. ICI: #235. b. Kwal/Coronado: 180‐11 DTM Primer. c. Moore: M33/M34 Polyamide. d. Pittsburgh: Pitt Guard Rapid Coat Epoxy Mastic 95‐245 e. S‐W: Macropoxy 646 (B58‐600). (Pro‐Cryl (B66‐310). f. D‐V: Mult‐E‐Poxy 180. g. SSPC SP1 clean and lightly sand to achieve adhesion. 2. Final Coat, not less than 2.0 mils: a. ICI: DTM 4208. b. Kwal/Coronado: DTM 182, Semi ‐Gloss, (DTM 180, Gloss). c. Moore: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel M‐28. d. Pittsburgh: DTM Acrylic 90‐374. e. S‐W: DTM Acrylic (B‐66). f. D‐V: Vers‐Acryl 222 Acrylic Semi‐Gloss. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Block ‐ Epoxy Emulsion Coating: Rooms: Toilet 1‐5, Chase A111. Provide one coat block filler and two finish coats epoxy emulsion. All interior paint to be epoxy. 1. Block Filler: Total dry film thickness not less than 5.0 mils. a. ICI: Bloxfil 4000. b. Kwal: C302 Ultratech Block Filler. c. Moore: Moorcraft Block Filler #285. e. S‐W: Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46. f. D‐V: Dia‐Pro Acrylic Block Filler, BF‐1515. 2. First and Second Coats: Epoxy Emulsion, semi‐gloss finish. a. ICI: Tru Glaze 4406. b. Kwal: 3190 Waterborne Semi‐Gloss Epoxy. c. Moore: Water Based Acrylic Epoxy M43/M44. d. Pittsburgh: 16‐551 Pitt Glaze Water Base. e. S‐W: Fast Clad DTM Epoxy B 70 Series. (Pro Industrial Zero VOC Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy B73‐300). f. D‐V: Vers‐E‐Poxy 131 Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy. B. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized): Acrylic Semi‐Gloss Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 1. Primer: Galvanized metal primer, total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. a. ICI: Devflex 4020 DTM Primer and Finish. b. Kwal: C309 Ultratech Primer. c. Moore: Acrylic Metal Primer M04. d. Pittsburgh: DTM 90‐712. e. S‐W: Pro‐Cryl B66‐310. f. D‐V: Vers‐Acryl 200 Acrylic Maintenance Primer/Finish. 2. Finish Coats: Exterior, semi‐gloss, acrylic enamel, total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils each. a. ICI: 4216 Devflex Acrylic Semi‐Gloss Enamel. b. Kwal: 8200 Acrylic Semi‐Gloss DTM Enamel. (C136 Ultratech). c. Moore: DTM Acrylic Semi‐Gloss Enamel M29. d. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Super Tech 6‐274. e. S‐W: ProMar 200 Semi‐Gloss Latex Enamel. (DTM B66‐200). f. D‐V: Finium DTM‐AT Acrylic Semi‐Gloss Enamel. C. Ferrous Metal: Full Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over a primer. 1. Primer: Synthetic, quick‐drying, rust‐inhibiting primer, total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. a. ICI: 4020 Devflex DTM Primer and Finish. b. Kwal: C309 Ultratech Primer. c. Moore: Acrylic Metal Primer M04. d. Pittsburgh: DTM 90‐712. e. S‐W: Pro‐Cryl (B66‐310). f. D‐V: Vers‐Acryl 200 Acrylic Maintenance Primer/Finish. 2. Finish Coat: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel, total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. a. ICI: 4208 Devflex Acrylic Gloss Enamel. b. Kwal: 9800 Acrylic Gloss Enamel. c. Moore: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. d. Pittsburgh: Speedhide 6‐8534. e. S‐W: DTM (B66‐100). f. D‐V: Finium DTM‐AT Acrylic Gloss Enamel. D. Interior Wood (Transparent/Clear Finish), sand between each coat: 1. Oil Based Stain to achieve color: a. ICI: 1700 Woodpride. b. Kwal: 8709 WoodKraft. c. Moore: Benwood Stain 234. d. Pittsburgh: REZ Interior Stain 77‐560. e. S‐W: A49‐200 Wood Classics Stain. (Wood Classics 250 VOC Stain). f. D‐V: Old Masters Hi‐Solid Penetrating Stain. 2. Sealer: a. ICI: 1808 Woodpride. b. Kwal: 6840 Woodkraft Satin Acrylic Urethane. c. Moore: Benwood M27‐00. d. Pittsburgh: Sanding Sealer 6‐10. e. S‐W: A68F90 Wood Classics Polyurethane, thinned. (Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, A68 Series) f. D‐V: Old Masters H20 Acrylic Satin Varnish. 3. Two Finish Coats: a. ICI: 1802 Satin Woodpride. b. Kwal: 6840 WoodKraft Satin Acrylic Urethane. c. Moore: Benwood Low Lustre 423. d. Pittsburgh: REZ Polyurethane 77‐89 Satin. e. S‐W: A68F90 Wood Classics Polyurethane. f. D‐V: Old Masters H20 Acrylic Satin Varnish. E. Concrete Floors ‐ Epoxy Floor Finish: Two finish coats over primer. 1. Primer: Heavy duty, two‐component, water‐borne, polyamide epoxy floor primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness not less than 1.5 mils. a. D‐V: Pinnacle Vers‐E‐Poxy 122 Water Reducible Polyamide Epoxy. b. S‐W: ArmorSeal Floor‐Plex 8100 Gloss. c. Comparable product. 2. First and Second Coats: Heavy duty, two‐component, water‐borne, polyamide epoxy floor coating, total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils each coat, gloss finish. a. D‐V: Pinnacle Vers‐E‐Poxy 122 Water Reducible Polyamide Epoxy. b. S‐W: ArmorSeal Floor‐Plex 8100 Gloss. c. Comparable product. SECTION 10 14 23 PANEL SIGNAGE PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Panel signs for: a. Room identification – ADA compliant b. Restroom signage – ADA compliant c. Information signage – building mounted d. Exterior metal signage – building mounted 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Accessible: In accordance with the accessibility standard. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs. 1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 3. Provide location for each sign on floor plans. 4. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and layout for each sign at least half size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign assembly, exposed component, and exposed finish. 1. Include representative Samples of available typestyles and graphic symbols. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign assembly showing all components and with the required finishes, in manufacturer's standard size unless otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Panel Signs: Full‐size Sample. 2. Exposed Accessories: Full‐size Sample of each accessory type. E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify locations of installed signage by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate conditions on Shop Drawings. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL A. Provide one sign of each type as a stock sample. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL SIGNS, GENERAL A. Regional Materials: Panel signs shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA‐ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs. 2.3 SIGNS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Southwell Company 2. DaVinci Sign Systems, Inc. 3. Miles Manufacturing Company. 4. Avalis Wayfinding Solutions, Inc. 5. Andco Industries 6. Scott signs 7. Best Manufacturing B. Room and Restroom identification – ADA Compliant: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows: 1. Aluminum Plaque a. 8” x 8” x ¼” 2. Sign‐Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth. a. Edge Condition: Beveled. b. Corners – 1/4” radius 3. Mounting: Blind Stud mount – threaded rods screwed into back of plaque and placed into cement filled holes. Align studs in‐line with mortar joints, sealant around edges 4. Text and Typeface: Accessible raised characters in Helvetica Medium, and Braille. Finish raised characters to contrast with background color, and finish Braille to match background color, paint black 5. Sign Types: a. Room Identification: 1) Room Title: Helvetica Medium. 2) Room Number: Helvetica Medium, text in upper case only. 3) Braille size: Grade II. 4) Locations: Adjacent to all door at Chase 111. b. Restroom Signs: Use 1 inch Helvetica Medium, text in upper case only. 1) Raised symbols for Men/Women/Wheelchair/Baby Changing 2) Locations: Adjacent to all restroom doors, in lieu of Room Identification sign. C. Door Symbol Signage – Pictoral symbols mounted on Stainless Steel doors into restrooms 1. Flat aluminum cut out symbols, shown on drawings 2. Paint black 3. 1’‐3” high 4. Apply with adhesive D. Informational Signage 1. Engraved aluminum flat panel, 3/8” thick with black fill letters 2. Blind Stud mount – threaded rods screwed into back of plaque and placed into cement filled holes. Align studs in‐line with mortar joints. 3. Apply silicone sealant around all edges 4. Exact copy to be determined by Owner 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following: B. Stud mounted C. Silicone Adhesive: Single‐Component, Nonsag, Neutral‐Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of signage work. B. Verify that sign‐support surfaces are within tolerances to accommodate signs without gaps or irregularities between backs of signs and support surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would impair installation. B. Install in locations on walls at latch side of – mounting dimensions shown on drawings, and in compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Mounting Methods: 1. Blind stud mount, threaded rods screwed into back of plaque and placed into cement filled holes a. Apply silicone sealant around all edges. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Flatness Tolerance: Sign panel shall remain flat under installed conditions as indicated and within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner. B. Remove and replace damaged or deformed signs and signs that do not comply with specified requirements. Replace signs with damaged or deteriorated finishes or components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed. D. On completion of installation, clean exposed surfaces of signs according to manufacturer's written instructions, and touch up minor nicks and abrasions in finish. Maintain signs in a clean condition during construction and protect from damage until acceptance by Owner. NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in‐service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified builders hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in‐service performance. C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor in good standing by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of Door Hardware specified in this Section from a single source, qualified supplier unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. 2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and ANSI A117.1 requirements and guidelines as directed in the model building code including, but not limited to, the following: 1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", including electrical components, devices, and accessories listed and labeled as defined in Article 100 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1 as follows: a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening‐force requirements indicated: 1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. 3. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors: a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch high. F. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. H. Pre‐Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing‐in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures I. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock‐up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.4 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special Warranty Periods: 1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 3. Five years for standard duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches. 4. Five years for exit hardware. 5. Twenty five years for manual surface door closers. 6. Two years for electromechanical door hardware. 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Continuing Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, and running concurrent with the specified warranty period, provide continuous (6) months full maintenance including repair and replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door opening operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products. 1.7 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. 1. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: a. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 1.8 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated: a. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches ‐ Heavy Weight, stainless steel 5" x 4 1/2" 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4‐1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non‐ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges. b. Non‐removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications: 1) Out‐swinging exterior doors. 2) Out‐swinging lockable doors. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA). b. McKinney Products (MK). c. Stanley Hardware (ST). d. McKinney Products (MK). e. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). f. Stanley Hardware (ST). 1.9 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified automatic, self‐latching, and manual flush bolts and surface bolts. Manual flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately six feet from the floor. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L. listed for windstorm components where applicable. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for appropriate installation and operation. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). B. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANS/BHMA A156.6 certified door pushes and pulls of type and design specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2‐inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2‐inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Ives (IV). 2) Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). 3) Trimco (TC). 1.10 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following: 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight‐ or clover‐type cam. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat‐type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored‐Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard. D. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified patented cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of a patented key. Cylinders are to be protected from unauthorized manufacture and distribution by manufacturer’s United States patents. Cylinders are to be factory keyed with owner having the ability for on‐site original key cutting. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Medeco (MC) ‐ X4 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) ‐ XC Series. E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. Furnish factory cut, nickel‐silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. 2. Grand Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, and a grand master key. F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Top Master Key: One (1) 2. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): Two (2) 4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): Two (2) 5. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10) 6. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2) 7. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2) G. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed construction cores where specified. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed under specified "Keying Conference". H. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 1.11 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Locksets to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant, stamped 12 gauge minimum formed steel case and be field‐reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Lockset trim (including knobs, levers, escutcheons, roses) to be the product of a single manufacturer. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti‐friction stainless steel latchbolt, and a full 1" throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions. Basis of Design: Cal‐Royal Products (CRP) Privacy with Key Outside and "Occupied" Indicator NM8496 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Corbin Russwin Hardware b. Sargent Manufacturing 1.12 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat‐Lip Strikes: For locks with three‐piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra‐Long‐Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum‐Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 1.13 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non‐handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. B. rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non‐critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non‐handed units standard. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: LCN Closers (LC) ‐ 4040XP Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) ‐ 351 Series. c. Norton Door Controls (NO) ‐ 7500 Series. d. Cal‐Royal – CR441 Series w/ metal cover, brushed aluminum finish 1.14 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Metal Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified metal protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), beveled on four edges (B4E), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 series, 050‐inch thick, with countersunk screw holes (CSK). 4. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. 5. Neoprene sponge seals and sweeps 6. National Guard Saddle Threshold, brushed aluminum finish 7. Metal Door Edging: Door protection edging fabricated from a minimum .050‐inch thick metal sheet, formed into an angle or "U" cap shapes, surface or mortised mounted onto edge of door. Provide appropriate leg overlap to account for protection plates as required. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 8. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). 1.15 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC). 1.16 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non‐corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RS). 3. Zero International (ZE). 1.17 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products ‐ Match stainless steel door finish. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 2 ‐ EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 2.2 PREPARATION 2.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." D. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 2.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted. 2.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 2.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. NO DESCRIPTION DATE SECTION 085413 ‐ FIBERGLASS WINDOWS PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for fiberglass windows. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation. C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified, 2 by 4 in size. D. Samples for Verification: For fiberglass windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches. 2. Exposed Hardware: Full‐size units. E. Product Schedule: For fiberglass windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each type of fiberglass window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Field quality‐control reports. D. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating fiberglass windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to fiberglass window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fiberglass windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Alpen Windows, 400 Series Ribbon Window B. Source Limitations: Obtain fiberglass windows from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window. 2.3 FIBERGLASS WINDOWS A. Provide the following types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Fixed. B. Frames and Sashes: Pultruded fiberglass complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 and with exposed exterior fiberglass surfaces finished with manufacturer's standard enamel coating complying with AAMA 623. 1. Nominal wall thickness 2.3mm, minimum glass content 60%. 2. Frame and sash corners are connected with molded reinforced polymer shear blocks and mechanically secured. Joints are factory sealed and neatly fitted together. Closed‐back frames shall be filled with insulation in all locations except vertical mullions where pultrusions are fitted with 3/8” thick cold‐rolled steel to meet structural design load requirements. 3. Exterior Color: Color selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Interior Finish: Matching exterior color and finish. 2.4 INSULATING GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Translucent. B. Low‐e Coatings: Soft Coat (sputtered) only ‐ no Hard Coat allowable. Subject to compliance with requirements, applicator shall be one of the following: 1. Applicators: a. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. b. Guardian Industries Corp. www.na.en.sunguardglass.com. c. Pittsburgh Plate Glass: www.ppg.com. d. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com e. Oldcastle Buildling Envelope: www.oldcastlebe.com. f. Acceptable Substitution C. Insulating‐Glass Units: Factory‐assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Edgetech I.G. Inc. "SuperSpacer‐Premium Plus"; www.edgetech360.com. a. Color: Black. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. D. Glass Type All Windows: 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Laminated glass 4. PPG Solarban 70 XL Surface #2; Acceptable Substitution 5. Interspace Content: Air 6. Indoor Lite: Tempered E. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate fiberglass windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for installing and anchoring windows. B. Glaze fiberglass windows in the factory. C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation. D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design wind loads of window units. E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built‐in components to ensure weathertight window installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning. C. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.1 STAINLESS‐STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: Basis of Design: Ceco Door ‐ ASSA ABLOY 1. Ambico Limited. 2. Dawson Doors. 3. De La Fontaine. 4. Forms+Surfaces. 5. Gensteel Doors, Incorporated. 6. Habersham Metal Products Company. 7. Krieger Specialty Products Company. 8. LaForce, Inc. 9. Next Door Company. 10. Security Metal Products Corporation. 11. Stainless Doors, Inc. 12. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance: SDI A250.4. B. Fire‐Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire‐protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire‐Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire‐rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature‐Rise Limit: , provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire‐test exposure. C. Smoke‐ and Draft‐Control Door Assemblies: provide assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. 1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure differential of 0.3‐inch wg of water. D. Fire‐Rated, Borrowed‐Lite Frame Assemblies: Assemblies that are listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire‐protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. Install in compliance with NFPA 80. 2.3 STAINLESS‐STEEL DOORS A. Stainless‐Steel Doors: Not less than 1‐3/4 inches thick. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on faces. 1. Face Sheets: Fabricate from 16 gage frames and doors thick, stainless‐steel sheet. 2. Core Construction: Standard Vertical Steel‐Stiffner, minimum 22 gage steel‐stiffners at 6 inches on‐center construction attached by either spot welds spaced not more than 5" on‐centers or stuffners permanently bonded to both faces. Fill spaces between stiffners with mineral‐fiber insulation a) Locations: Exterior Doors. 1. Vertical Edges for Single‐Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 2. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels.. a. Spot welded to both face sheets. b. Securely fastened using adhesive. 8. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to NAAMM‐HMMA 866 with reinforcing plates from stainless steel. B. Stainless‐Steel Finishes: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 1. No. 6 satin finish, general purpose with visible grain. 2.5 STAINLESS‐STEEL FRAMES A. Stainless‐Steel Frames: Fabricate stainless‐steel frames of construction indicated, with faces of corners mitered and contact edges closed tight. 1. Frame Construction: Mitered corners ‐ "closed and tight", full depth continuously welded seams, finished smooth with no bisible seams. Knock down frame types are not permitted. 16 gage minum steel sheet. a. Weld frames according to NAAMM‐HMMA 820. 1. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to NAAMM‐HMMA 866 with reinforcing plates from [stainless] [uncoated] [metallic‐coated] steel. 2. Head Reinforcement: 0.109‐inch‐thick, stainless‐steel channel or angle stiffener for opening widths more than 48 inches. 3. Jamb Anchors: a. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap‐and‐stirrup or T‐shaped anchors to suit frame size ‐ not less than 16 (0.8 mm) gage thickness, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm)long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 8. Floor Anchors: Not less than 14 gage thick, formed from same material as frames, provided at each jamb, and as follows: a. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip‐type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. b. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable‐type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2‐inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. B. Materials: C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one‐half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 50 percent. 1. Stainless‐Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, austenitic stainless steel 2. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B. 3. Metallic‐Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B; with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating. 4. Frame Anchors: Stainless‐steel sheet. Same type as door face. 5. Frame Anchors: Steel sheet, hot‐dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 6. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Stainless‐steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 for bolts and nuts. 7. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot‐dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. D. Stainless‐Steel Finishes: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. 1. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Stainless‐Steel Door Fabrication: Stainless‐steel doors to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. 1. Seamed Edge Construction: Both vertical door edges joined by visible, continuous interlocking seam (lock seam) full height of door. 2. Seamed Edge Construction: Both vertical door edges joined by visible seam that is projection, spot, or tack welded on inside edges of door at minimum 6 inches o.c. 3. Seamless Edge Construction: Door face sheets joined at vertical edges by continuous weld extending full height of door; with edges ground and polished, providing smooth, flush surfaces with no visible seams. 4. Exterior Doors: Close top edges flush and seal joints against water penetration. Provide weep‐hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. 5. Stops and Moldings: Factory cut openings in doors. Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. a. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 6. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare stainless‐steel doors to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the door hardware schedule. a. Reinforce doors to receive nontemplated mortised and surface‐mounted door hardware. 7. Tolerances: Fabricate doors to tolerances indicated in NAAMM‐HMMA 866. B. Stainless‐Steel Frame Fabrication: Fabricate stainless‐steel frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. 1. Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated from same thickness metal as frames. 2. Provide countersunk, flat‐, or oval‐head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 5. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches wide, provide continuous head reinforcement for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather‐stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Provide plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. a. Single‐Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. 7. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around [glazed lites] [and] [solid panels]. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. a. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing[ or panel] and type of installation . b. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on Drawings for interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches above finish floor with a [45] [90]‐degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with stainless‐steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded‐stainless‐steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame. 8. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare stainless‐steel frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the door hardware schedule. a. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface‐mounted door hardware. 9. Plaster Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises and mounting holes in frames to be grouted. 10. Tolerances: Fabricate frames to tolerances indicated in NAAMM‐HMMA 866. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of not more than 4 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. B. Mineral Fiber Insulation: Insulation made of rock‐wool fibers, slag‐wool fibers, or glass fibers. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stainless‐steel doors and frames. B. Examine roughing‐in for embedded and built‐in anchors to verify actual locations of stainless‐steel door‐frame connections before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded‐in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace stainless‐steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb, and perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface‐mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install stainless‐steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with NAAMM‐HMMA 866 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Stainless‐Steel Frames: 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumb, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire‐protection‐rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Apply corrosion‐resistant coating to backs of grout‐filled frames. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder‐actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal‐Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral‐fiber insulation behind frames. 4. In‐Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 5. In‐Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 7. Grouted Frames: Solidly fill space between frames and substrate with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust stainless‐steel frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb, and perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Stainless‐Steel Doors: Fit stainless steel doors accurately in frames with the following clearances: 1. Non‐Fire‐Rated Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work including stainless‐steel doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Clean grout and other bonding material off stainless‐steel doors and frames immediately after installation. C. Stainless‐Steel Touchup: Immediately after erection, smooth any abraded areas of stainless steel and polish to match undamaged finish. NO DESCRIPTION DATE C. Plumbing to Countertops Clear D. Window to Painted Wall Wall Paint Color E. Door Frame to Painted Wall Wall Paint Color F. Window to Natural CMU or Brick Mortar (when CMU is not painted) G. Door Frame to Nat'l CMU or Brick Mortar (when CMU is not painted) H. Wall Mounted Devices Wall Paint Color I. Wood to Other Material Clear J. Masonry Control Joint Match Color of Adjacent Mortar K. (Consult with Architect for specific or unusual locations) 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field‐Adhesion Testing: Field test joint‐sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform five tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field‐Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled‐out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field‐adhesion hand‐pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field‐adhesion‐test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint‐sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2‐inch‐ (13‐mm‐) wide joints formed between two 6‐inch‐ (150‐ mm‐) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint‐Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint‐sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint‐sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint‐sealant formulation. 4. Joint‐sealant color. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. C. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint‐sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section. Install 5 lineal feet of each type of exposed to view sealant for acceptance of color and workmanship by Architect. Installation may become part of final work if accepted. Performing work without Architect's acceptance will be subject to rejection and removal 1. Per Section 01 40 00, an entire mockup wall assembly including masonry, window, flashings, copings, metal wall panels, insulation, glazing, sealants, etc. will be required for review by Architect before proceeding with Work. D. Pre‐installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. E. Sealant not fully adhered to joint surfaces and not neat and workmanlike in appearance will be rejected. Rejected work shall be removed and joints thoroughly cleaned prior to installing new sealant. F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint‐sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C). 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint‐sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint‐sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Liquid‐Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid‐applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. C. Stain‐Test‐Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated in the Color Schedule article below, and as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single‐Component, Nonsag, Neutral‐Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials ‐ SilPruf SCS 2000. c. Pecora Corporation; 890 NST. d. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil‐C990. e. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 3. 2. Applications: a. Control, expansion and soft joints in masonry, exterior and interior. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between exterior metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior non‐traffic joints for which no other sealant is indicated. B. Mildew‐Resistant, Single‐Component, Nonsag, Neutral‐Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Pecora Corporation; 898. b. Acceptable Substitution: See Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements. 2. Applications: Interior joints between dissimilar materials 2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single‐Component, Pourable, Traffic‐Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR‐201. c. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex ‐ 1CSL. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45. 2. Applications: Use for exterior and interior pedestrian and vehicular traffic bearing joints, joints between foundation walls and adjacent sidewalks, joints between curbs and sidewalks, and open joints between sidewalk sections. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem‐Calk 600. c. DAP; Dynaflex 230. d. Pecora Corporation; AVW920. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2. Applications: Use for interior wall and ceiling control joints (except masonry control and expansion joints), joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces, joints between casework and interior walls, joints between plumbing fixtures and adjacent materials, and other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed‐cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open‐cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint‐sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond‐Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint‐filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self‐adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint‐sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint‐sealant‐ substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint‐sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint‐sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil‐free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form‐release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint‐sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint‐sealant‐substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint‐sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint‐sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Install sealant between all dissimilar materials, whether or not shown on Drawings. B. Install sealant at all conduit, pipe and duct penetrations in walls, floors and ceilings to comply with requirements of Building Code and Health Department. Coordinate work with Section 07 84 13, Penetration Firestopping. C. General: Comply with joint‐sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. D. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Installation not tooled correctly or overrun on other materials is cause for rejection. E. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross‐sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. F. Install bond‐breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. G. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross‐sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. H. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. NO DESCRIPTION DATE SECTION 07 62 00 – FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop‐ and field‐assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of edge conditions, as applicable. 8. Include details of special conditions. 9. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 10. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1‐1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10). C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory‐applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Unit‐Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full‐size Sample. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is FM Approvals listed. C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in‐service performance. 1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are FM Approvals listed, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1‐90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime‐sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic‐Coated Steel Sheet: Provide aluminum‐zinc alloy‐coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil‐coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Exposed Coil‐Coated Finish: a. Two‐Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light‐colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). C. Stainless‐Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface. 1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled). 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt‐saturated organic felt; nonperforated. B. Self‐Adhering, High‐Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip‐resistant polyethylene‐ or polypropylene‐film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl‐ or SBS‐modified asphalt adhesive, with release‐paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.‐Conn.; Grace Ice and Water Shield HT. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra SA. e. Metal‐Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. f. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment. g. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade SA‐HT. 2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher. 3. Low‐Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) or lower. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin‐sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m)minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self‐tapping screws, self‐locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self‐drilling screws, gasketed, with hex‐washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory‐applied coating. Provide metal‐backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High‐strength aluminum or stainless‐steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum‐Zinc Alloy‐Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot‐dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure‐sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release‐paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold‐applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8‐inch (3‐mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. 1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. 2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings. D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion‐type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1‐49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat‐lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. I. Fabricate storm collars from 24 gauge galvanized steel for pipes greater than 3 inches in diameter. Spot weld angle brackets to collar (properly spaced) and drill two 3/16 inch diameter holes on vertical leg of brackets to secure collar with a nut and bolt assembly. For small pipes, fabricate from 4 pound desilverized pig lead. Secure with a stainless steel draw band. Seal top edge of storm collars with sealant. J. Fabricate roof jacks from 24 gauge galvanized steel with a minimum height of 8 inches and 4 flanges. K. All two piece roof jacks shall be joined with an inside slip joint (pocket) and soldered. Refer to SMACNA Plate 76, Chart 12, Joint J11. 2.6 LOW‐SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop): Fabricate in minimum 96‐inch‐ (2400‐mm‐) long, but not exceeding 12‐foot‐ (3.6‐m‐) long sections. Furnish with 6‐inch‐ (150‐mm‐) wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. 1. Joint Style: Overlapped, 4 inches (100 mm) wide. 2. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a. Aluminum‐Zinc Alloy‐Coated Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick. 2.7 DETAIL FLASHING A. Provide composite flashing product consisting of a pliable self‐adhesive sheet of butyl‐rubber compound bonded to a high‐density, woven polypropylene film. 1. Basis‐of‐Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, DOW Weathermate Straight Flashing, or comparable product by one of the following. a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. b. Acceptable Substitution: See Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements. 2. Thickness: not less than 32 mil. 3. Tensile Strength: 400 psi. 4. Minimum Elongation to Failure: 200%. 5. Pliability: 180 degree bend over 1 inch mandrel at ‐25 degrees F. 6. Crack cycling: Unaffected by 1/8 inch at ‐25 degrees F. 7. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbs, minimum. 8. Permeance to Water: 0.05 perms, maximum. 9. Permeance to Air: 0.002 cf/min/sf. 10. Water Absorption: 0.1% maximum. B. Where flashing is required to bend in three dimensions, such as at window opening heads and window opening sills, provide DOW Weathermate Flexible Flashing, or equal. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air‐ or water‐resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). B. Self‐Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self‐adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3‐1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. C. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Provide closure for sheet metal flashing terminations. The butt ends shall be fabricated with flanges that conform to the face of the adjacent wall or substrate. "Dog ears" or gussets shall be attached and soldered where the metal is cut and bent to change planes. Seal butt plate along the tope edge with caulking. Butyl sealant tape shall be sandwiched between the wall and the metal flange. 6. Contractor shall round the corners of all flanges that are to be nailed and set over the completed membrane or flashings. 7. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 8. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure‐treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of stainless‐steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant‐filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant‐type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." G. Rivets: Rivet joints in where necessary for strength. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1‐49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1‐49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall‐opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Wall Flashing: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall‐opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8‐inch (3‐mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. install. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of roof edge flashing that is FM Approvals approved. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements. a. Provide FM Approvals' Assembly Number and system description. b. Include description of field, perimeter and corner areas and number of fasteners required for each area. 2. Confirm in writing that roofing system is fully warrantable under the terms of these specifications. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system. 1. Test Data: Independent laboratory test results shall be submitted for all specified performance criteria, including ASTM E119, ASTM D226 Type 1 and ASTM E84. E. Field quality‐control reports. F. Warranties: Sample of warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Approvals approved for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project that has five consecutive years documented history. 1. Manufacturer shall have five years consecutive history of successful roofing provided to similar projects. 2. Product support shall be available through a full time firm or individual based or branched in Colorado. B. Fabricator Qualifications for pre‐finished metal edge flashing: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in‐service performance. 1. For roof edge flashings that are FM Approvals approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved. C. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty. 1. Installer shall have been in business under the same name for no less than 24 consecutive months prior to bid opening. 2. Project superintendent shall: a. Be certified by the roofing manufacturer for warranted work installations for not less than 12 months prior to commencing work of this section. b. Have total previous experience including no less than 500 squares of the specified system. c. Provide a full‐time presence at the site during roofing activities. D. Source Limitations: Obtain roofing system components, including roof insulation, pre‐finished metal edge flashing, and fasteners, from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or from a source approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. E. Exterior Fire‐Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather, including wind over 25 m.p.h. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. 1. If installation at lower temperatures is desired, submit written plan to Architect for review, including alternative installation sequencing and alternative materials. Prior written approval is required to proceed. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. F. Each night, the roofing system shall be made watertight. Should any portion of the new system become wet, that amount of the system shall be removed and reinstalled with new, dry materials over a dry deck and insulation substrate. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Special warranty includes entire roofing assembly: membrane roofing, flashings, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate board, pre‐finished metal edge flashing, roofing accessories, roof walkways, and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING A. Fully‐Adhered Fabric‐Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.; b. Firestone Building Products Company c. GAF Materials Corporation d. Johns Manville e. Versico: VersiWeld: www.versico.com. 2. Thickness: 80 mils (1.5 mm), nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: Tan. 2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid‐type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard water based or low VOC adhesive. C. Sheet Flashing: Same material, color, and thickness as membrane. 2.3 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by or approved by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application that produce FM Approvals‐approved roof insulation. B. Type: Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation, ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade 3, UL Standard 263 Fire Resistance, glass‐fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. C. Type: Extruded Polystyrene. D. Provide tapered insulation to form prefabricated saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. E. Thickness: To achieve specified R‐value, not including tapered insulation thickness. Install in two layers, with joints staggered. F. Coordinate insulation heights with parapet heights shown on Drawings. Bring discrepancies to Architect's attention in Shop Drawings. 2.4 INSULATION COVER BOARD A. Cover Board: 1. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, primed glass‐mat, water‐resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick, minimum. a. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dens Deck Prime Roof Board by Georgia‐Pacific Corporation, or comparable product. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory‐coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion‐resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation, cover board and substrate board to structural metal deck, acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer, and specifically identified in the FM Approvals listed assembly. 2.6 METAL EDGE FLASHING A. Metallic‐Coated Steel Sheet: Provide aluminum‐zinc alloy‐coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil‐ coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Thickness: 20 gauge, unless noted otherwise. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat. 3. Exposed Coil‐Coated Finish: a. Two‐Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light‐colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). B. Underlayment Materials: 1. Self‐Adhering, High‐Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip‐resistant polyethylene‐ or polypropylene‐film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl‐ or SBS‐modified asphalt adhesive, with release‐paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, as recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. C. Fabricate metal edge flashing in minimum 96‐inch‐ (2400‐mm‐) long, but not exceeding 12‐foot‐ (3.6‐m‐) long, sections. 2.7 ROOFING ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T‐joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories as required for a complete and weathertight roofing installation. B. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: As required for system assembly and conditions. Compatible with membrane and adhesives. C. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane. D. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same material as membrane. 2.8 AIR BARRIER A. Fully Adhered, Peel and Stick vapor permeable air barrier. Henry Blueskin VP100 or equal. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking." 4. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. 5. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 6. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 7. Verify that air‐ or water‐resistant barriers have been installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof‐drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. D. Install acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips, specified in Section 05 31 00 "Steel Decking," according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions, immediately before installation of overlying construction and to remain dry. E. Do not roll carts, stack materials, equipment, etc., so as to cause damage to metal roof deck. Metal deck damaged by roofer shall be replaced at Roofing Installation Contractor's expense. 1. Fasten cover boards and insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification. 2. Locate fasteners in main body of deck, not in flutes. Provide screws that will penetrate deck and leave maximum one‐inch visible from floor below. Failure to install correctly will result in removal of damaged roof deck and replacement at no additional cost to Owner. 3.5 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot‐air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring. I. Protect roof drain bowls, pipes, and clamping bolt holes from damage. J. Seal drain perimeter daily to prevent moisture intrusion below roof membrane. Seal edges of in‐progress work before end of each work day. K. Clear roof drains and lines at the end of each workday. 3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field‐formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot‐air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF EDGE FLASHING A. Install self‐adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3‐1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. B. General: Anchor edge flashing and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete edge flashing systems. 1. Install true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Install exposed edge flashing with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 4. Provide closure for flashing terminations. The butt ends shall be fabricated with flanges that conform to the face of the adjacent wall or substrate. "Dog ears" or gussets shall be attached and soldered where the metal is cut and bent to change planes. Seal butt plate along the top edge with caulking. Butyl sealant tape shall be sandwiched between the wall and the metal flange. 5. Contractor shall round the corners of all flanges that are to be nailed and set over the completed membrane or flashings. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure‐treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of sheet metal with bituminous coating where trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. E. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or substrate not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve FM Approvals approval. F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. G. Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1‐49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification. H. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. I. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align edge flashing within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8‐inch (3‐mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. D. At completion of work, test drains to ensure system is free running and drains are watertight. E. Metal edge Flashing: 1. Clean off excess sealants. 2. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as metal edge flashing are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. 3. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Application: at acoustical deck only. B. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together. 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. 1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations. G. On metal deck, place boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes. H. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. I. At roof drains, use factory‐tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 24 inches minimum on all four sides. J. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. K. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop‐ and field‐assembled work. 3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 6. Include details of termination points and assemblies. 7. Include details of edge conditions, as applicable. 8. Include details of special conditions. 9. Include details of connections to adjoining work. 10. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1‐1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:10). C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory‐applied finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish. 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Unit‐Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full‐size Sample. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For fabricator. B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is FM Approvals listed. C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in‐service performance. 1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are FM Approvals listed, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Per Section 01 40 00, an entire mockup wall assembly including masonry, window, flashings, copings, metal wall panels, insulation, glazing, sealants, etc. will be required for review by Architect before proceeding with Work. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm). E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. 1. Use sealant‐filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch (25 mm) into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F (4 and 21 deg C), set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant‐type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C). 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." G. Rivets: Rivet joints in where necessary for strength. 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1‐49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1‐49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall‐opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Wall Flashing: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall‐opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8‐inch (3‐mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. C. Clean off excess sealants. D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during construction. E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1‐90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime‐sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic‐Coated Steel Sheet: Provide aluminum‐zinc alloy‐coated steel sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation, Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil‐coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Surface: Smooth, flat. 2. Exposed Coil‐Coated Finish: a. Two‐Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light‐colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm). C. Stainless‐Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; with smooth, flat surface. 1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled). 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt‐saturated organic felt; nonperforated. B. Self‐Adhering, High‐Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip‐resistant polyethylene‐ or polypropylene‐film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl‐ or SBS‐ metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Residential, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.‐Conn.; Grace Ice and Water Shield HT. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Kirsch Building Products, LLC; Sharkskin Ultra SA. e. Metal‐Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. f. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Specialty Tile & Metal Underlayment. g. SDP Advanced Polymer Products Inc; Palisade SA‐HT. 2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher. 3. Low‐Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) or lower. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin‐sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m)minimum. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self‐tapping screws, self‐locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self‐drilling screws, gasketed, with hex‐washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory‐applied coating. Provide metal‐backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High‐strength aluminum or stainless‐steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum‐Zinc Alloy‐Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot‐dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure‐sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release‐paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Bituminous Coating: Cold‐applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187. F. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that air‐ or water‐resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm). B. Self‐Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self‐adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3‐1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. C. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, before installing sheet metal flashing and trim. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool marks. 5. Provide closure for sheet metal flashing terminations. The butt ends shall be fabricated with flanges that conform to the face of the adjacent wall or substrate. "Dog ears" or gussets shall be attached and soldered where the metal is cut and bent to change planes. Seal butt plate along the tope edge with caulking. Butyl sealant tape shall be sandwiched between the wall and the metal flange. 6. Contractor shall round the corners of all flanges that are to be nailed and set over the completed membrane or flashings. 7. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 8. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure‐treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard. 1. Coat concealed side of stainless‐steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious NO DESCRIPTION DATE sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold‐formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out‐of‐square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire‐resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire‐resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire‐resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold‐formed framing without reducing thickness of fire‐resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire‐resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire‐resistive materials from damage. C. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold‐formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold‐formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop‐ or field‐fabricated, cold‐formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true‐to‐line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). D. Install cold‐formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold‐formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one‐piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold‐formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," in built‐up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold‐formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. SECTION 06 10 00 ‐ ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory‐fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood‐preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire‐retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire‐retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Fastener Patterns: Full‐size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC‐ES: 1. Wood‐preservative‐treated wood. 2. Fire‐retardant‐treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Shear panels. 5. Power‐driven fasteners. 6. Powder‐actuated fasteners. 7. Expansion anchors. 8. Metal framing anchors. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage and installation. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules‐writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. C. All interior wood (including inside exterior walls), plywood and blocking is to be fire‐retardant treated unless exempted by Section 603, International Building Code. 2.2 WOOD‐PRESERVATIVE‐TREATED LUMBER A. Wood exposed to weather, in contact with concrete or masonry, roofing, waterproofing or flashing is to be preservative treated. B. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. C. Kiln‐dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below‐grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. 5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs‐on‐grade. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Construction or No. 2 grade. 1. Application: As indicated. 2. Species: a. Hem‐fir (north); NLGA. b. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. c. Spruce‐pine‐fir; NLGA. d. Hem‐fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. e. Spruce‐pine‐fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. f. Northern species; NLGA. g. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA. h. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. B. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 2.5 PLYWOOD A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C‐C Plugged, fire‐retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4‐inch (19‐mm) nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure‐preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power‐Driven Fasteners: NES NER‐272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon‐steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4). 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Stainless‐Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. B. Post Bases: Adjustable‐socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch (25 mm) above base and with 2‐inch‐ (50‐mm‐) minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch (2.8 mm) thick. C. Hold‐Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold‐downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self‐adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized‐asphalt compound, bonded to a high‐density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire‐retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Metal Anchors: Install metal anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative‐treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. H. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER‐272 for power‐driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One‐ and Two‐Family Dwellings. I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. J. Provide rough opening framing for doors, windows and roof openings. K. Wood exposed to weather, in contact with concrete or masonry, roofing, waterproofing or flashing is to be preservative treated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Examine architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings to identify all zones and areas in which blocking is required. B. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. C. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. D. Where wood‐preservative‐treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. E. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure‐preservative‐treated, key‐beveled lumber not less than 1‐1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. F. Specifically, provide non‐structural framing and blocking for the following: 1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs. 3.3 ROOF RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Secure roof blocking to resist wind loads of 200 lbs/lf. C. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. Construct curb members of single pieces for each side. At prefabricated curb conditions, install blocking to level equipment and to provide 8 inches minimum between bottom of counterflashing and horizontal roof surface per NRCA requirements. Coordinate all roof edge blocking heights with Division 07 contractor's tapered insulation heights prior to installation. D. The amount of blocking shown on Drawings is not intended to define the amount necessary to complete construction at all areas of the roof. This amount varies and must be determined by the Contractor and coordinated with roofing and insulation Shop Drawings. No extras will be allowed for additional roof blocking not shown on Drawings but required to provide a complete roofing installation. E. Provide continuous wood blocking support under prefabricated metal curb flanges. Bevel blocking to allow prefabricated curb to sit square, level and plumb. Attach blocking and metal curb flanges to structure to resist wind pressures specified for roofing 3.4 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 74 19 – Waste Management and Disposal. Comply with applicable regulations B. Do not burn scrap on project site. C. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. D. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co‐generation facilities or “waste‐to‐energy” facilities. E. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. F. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron‐treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA‐registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA‐registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA‐registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA‐registered label. SECTION 06 20 23 ‐ FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and product. Indicate component materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood‐preservative treatment from chemical‐treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical‐treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material. 2. Include data for fire‐retardant treatment from chemical‐treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical‐treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with non‐factory‐applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm) for panels. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Deliver finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install finish carpentry materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Do not finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. B. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. C. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no urea‐formaldehyde resin. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M‐2. 2.2 WOOD CEILING PANELS A. 1 X 6 (3/4” X 5” exposed) ESLP (Pine) 1. #2 or better, T&G, square edge with no reveal. Sand Smooth. B. Application: Underside of roof, interior and exterior. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. B. Low‐Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small‐Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Glue: Aliphatic‐resin, polyurethane, or resorcinol wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use. 1. Wood glue shall have a VOC content of 30 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Wood Sealer for all Exterior Wood: Olympic Wood Protector Clear Waterproofing Sealant, Clear. F. ¾” Extruded Aluminum for wood trim at roof: Fry Reglet “T” Reveal Molding TRM‐75‐75 anodized aluminum. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 72 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand unless otherwise indicated. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32‐inch (0.8‐mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16‐inch (1.5‐mm) maximum offset for reveal installation. 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. 3.4 TRIM INSTALLATION A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full‐length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Miter at returns, miter at outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight‐fitting joints with full‐surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end‐to‐end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment. 1. Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across joints. 2. Install trim after gypsum‐board joint finishing operations are completed. 3. Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory‐applied finishes, if any. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. SECTION 07 21 00 ‐ THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam‐plastic insulation, from ICC‐ES. C. Test Data: Independent laboratory test results shall be submitted for all specified performance criteria, including ASTM E119 and ASTM E84. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface‐Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Work shall be performed by experienced installers, in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, providing an unbroken insulation barrier between the inside and outside the building. C. Do not install exterior wall cavity insulation or interior vapor barrier and finish until the exterior of the building is completely dried in and sealed. For masonry veneer and construction, this includes installation of veneer and sealants at all joints and penetrations. D. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Wet or otherwise damaged insulation will not be accepted. C. Protect foam‐plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam‐plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam‐plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM‐PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded‐Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame‐spread and smoke‐developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. (R5 per inch minimum). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. e. Acceptable Substitution: See Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements. 2. Type X, 15 psi (104 kPa). B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. C. Application: At foundations at building perimeter, and as indicated. 2.2 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION A. Closed‐Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum flame‐spread and smoke‐developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. Product must be approved as alternate material per Section 10 4. 11 of 2006 IBC for air and vapor barrier in lieu of #15 asphalt felt per Section 1404, 2006 IBC. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Demilec USA LLC.; "Heatlok Soy 200": www.demilecusa.com. b. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.; "CC": www.bsna.com. c. Acceptable Substitution: See Section 01 60 00 – Product Requirements. 2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (43 K x m/W at 24 deg C). 3. Installer shall provide equipment to spray apply polyurethane foam including, but not limited to, high pressure plural component proportioning pump, heated hoses of suitable length, spray gun, drum pumps or other material feeding system, and other ancillary equipment necessary to complete the Work. 4. Test Application: Prior to start of work, as part of the masonry wall mockup, installer shall spray apply an area of approximately 100 sf at the specified thickness as directed by the Architect for the purpose of demonstrating visual and physical effects. Proceed with work only after Architect's acceptance of test application. 5. Installer shall monitor the required minimum thickness versus thickness applied using appropriate instrument. Areas not achieving required minimum thickness shall be corrected until compliant. 6. Substrate: Proceed with spray polyurethane foam application only after substrate construction, penetration work and related welding and other hot work has been completed. Verify that mortar has cured sufficiently and masonry substrate is dry by checking surface for moisture with Moisture Detection Paper (MDP) strips. Verify that all sheathing joints are taped before applying primer. 7. Do not install insulation when ambient temperature is lower than 35 degrees F without specific authorization of the manufacturer. Do no install spray polyurethane foam during precipitation or when precipitation is imminent. Do not install when the ambient humidity exceeds the manufacturer's printed limits. B. Application: Exterior wall, and as indicated. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW‐GRADE INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in from exterior walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SPRAY FOAM INSULATION A. Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with maximum first pass of 1 inch or less thickness. B. Apply insulation by spray method, to a uniform monolithic density without voids. C. Shield the spray foam from interior exposure with an approved thermal barrier. D. Apply to a minimum cured thickness shown on the Drawings. Apply full thickness in any given area the same day in maximum lifts recommended by manufacturer. E. Installer shall monitor the required minimum thickness versus thickness applied using appropriate instrument. Areas not achieving required minimum thickness shall be corrected until compliant. F. Apply foam on the interior face of areas where indicated on Drawings. G. Remove overspray from adjacent surfaces including wood blocking. H. Patch damaged areas. I. Where applied to voids and gaps assure space for expansion to avoid pressure on adjacent materials that may bind operable parts. J. Trim excess away for applied trim or remove as required for continuous sealant bead. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. NO DESCRIPTION DATE D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L‐shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry‐veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten anchors to concrete backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Insert slip‐in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. 3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter. B. Adhere thin brick to substrate with products and methods acceptable to face brick manufacturer. 3.9 CONTROL JOINTS 1. Install temporary foam‐plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form control joints in brick as follows: 1. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) for installation of sealant and backer rod. a. Sealant and backer rod shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." D. Provide horizontal, pressure‐relieving joints by inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 1. Locate horizontal, pressure‐relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. E. Locate vertical control joints at a maximum of 30 feet oc in all masonry walls if not otherwise shown. In 4 inch wide CMU walls, locate vertical control joints at a maximum of 12 feet oc. Coordinate location of control joints with Architect. F. All continuous vertical masonry joints shall be filled with sealant per Section 07 92 00, whether or not shown as control joints on the Drawings. This includes other than 90 degree corners not requiring special shapes. 3.10 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick‐size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block‐size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted including foundations walls, above ledge or shelf angles and lintels and under parapet caps. C. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 8 inches into adjacent masonry or turn up at least 8 inches to form watertight pan at non‐masonry construction. D. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through‐wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At masonry‐veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm). 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams. 4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1‐1/2 inches (38 mm) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 5. Install metal drip plates with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 6. Install metal drip plates beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip plate. E. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. F. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. maximum, unless otherwise indicated. a. Weep holes at Emperor brick shall be at each head joint. G. Install weep/vents in head joints in exterior wythes at the top and bottom of brick veneer at 24 inches o.c. horizontally, or at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. 3.12 BUILT IN WORK A. As work progresses, install built‐in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work and furnished under other sections. B. Install built‐in items plumb, level, and true to line. C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Verify security and electronic hardware wiring is in place before grouting door frames. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent block cores completely around perimeter of frames, reinforced with continuous #5 bar unless otherwise shown. Maintain uniform joint between masonry and hollow metal frame of approximately 1/4 inch, with a neat concave tooled joint. 1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code." 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site‐prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site‐prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. H. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. I. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 28 days. 3.14 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS A. Special Inspection shall be performed for compliance with Drawings and standards cited herein: 1. Observe preparation of all masonry prisms and preparation of all grout and mortar specimens. 2. For masonry constructed by low‐lift grouting techniques, observe the following on a schedule of not less than 2 times each day that masonry construction is in progress: a. Proportioning, mixing and placing of mortar and grout. b. Placement of masonry units. c. Type, size and locations of reinforcing, ties and accessories. 3. Daily reports of all special inspections shall be prepared and distributed as specified herein within 48 hours of the time the inspections were made. Provide other reports as required by the governing Building Inspection Department. 3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In‐Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one‐half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and non‐masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket‐and‐brush hand‐cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary non‐acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Verify that cleaning solution is appropriate for brick color. Apply to test area prior to commencing cleaning operations. Clean brick surfaces with specified cleaning solution in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8‐2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.16 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace defective materials, correct defective workmanship and leave masonry clean. Any cracked, stained or discolored masonry shall be rejected and shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. 3.17 IDENTIFICATION A. Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protected openings or penetrations shall be permanently identified with painted stenciling located in accessible concealed floor, floor‐ceiling or attic spaces, repeated 30 feet horizontally, 2 inch lettering stating: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER ‐ PROTECT ALL OPENINGS". 3.18 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil‐contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. SECTION 05 12 00 ‐ STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural‐steel to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated. 2. Use ASD; data are given at service‐load level. B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained. C. Construction: Braced frame. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural‐steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip‐critical high‐strength bolted connections. 5. Identify members and connections of the seismic‐load‐resisting system. 6. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones. 7. Identify demand critical welds. 8. Reviewed shop drawings may not have materials added except with approval of Structural Engineer. The use of modified structural drawing reproducibles as shop drawings is not permitted. 9. Review of shop drawings will be for size and arrangement of members and their connections. Fabricating dimensions for the correct fitting of members in shop and field are the responsibility of the fabricator. 10. Design of connections, including any temporary erection clips and connections not indicated on the structural drawings shall be completed by the fabricator in accordance with the intent of key details shown and in accordance with applicable national codes and specifications noted elsewhere. 11. Substitutions of modification of the design will not be accepted unless indicated as a revision on the shop drawings. All proposed substitutions and/or revisions shall be "clouded" in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Substitutions and/or revisions that are not clouded will not be accepted and Work not in compliance with Construction Documents shall be removed from the project even if installed in place. C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code ‐ Steel," for each welded joint, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. E. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Direct‐tension indicators. 3. Tension‐control, high‐strength bolt‐nut‐washer assemblies. 4. Shop primers. 5. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality‐control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years of documented experience. Fabricator must be registered as an approved fabricator per Section 17 04 .2.2 of International Building Code. Submit proof of registration with Shop Drawing submittal. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC‐Certified Erector, Category ACSE or CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code ‐ Steel." 1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom‐flange, demand‐critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8. FCAW‐S and FCAW‐G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification. D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. E. Structural steel exposed to view requires carefully designed joints and finished surfaces. F. Material Substitutions: 1. If sizes of steel members noted cannot be obtained, members of equal or higher strength and of equal suitability may be substituted at no extra cost to Owner. 2. Contractor assumes responsibility for fitting substituted members. 3. Submit requests for substitutions to Structural Engineer for approval prior to making substitution. 4. Coordinate substitution of member size(s) with Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors prior to making substitution. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL‐STEEL MATERIAL A. Channels, Angles‐Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M C. Cold‐Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard, Extra strong, Double‐extra strong. 2. Finish: Black. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High‐Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy‐hex steel structural bolts B. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, weldable, ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy‐hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. 2.3 PRIMER A. Low‐Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small‐Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Primer: Comply with Section 09 90 00 “Painting" 2.4 GROUT A. Metallic, Shrinkage‐Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory‐packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30‐minute working time. B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage‐Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory‐packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30‐minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360. 1. Camber structural‐steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high‐strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match‐mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural‐steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop‐priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High‐Strength Bolts: Shop install high‐strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or Pretensioned. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built‐up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high‐strength bolted with slip‐critical connections. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC‐SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." Blast profile shall not exceed 1.5 mils. Remove oil or grease with a suitable solvent, prior to priming. C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one‐coat, non‐asphaltic primer complying with SSPC‐PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One‐Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). E. Exterior structural steel shall be primed per Section 09 90 00 “Painting”. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural‐steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop‐bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop‐welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete‐ and masonry‐bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast‐in‐place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. B. No steel shall be erected until elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, slopes, pitches, alignment of plates, locations of anchor bolts and similar items have been verified with 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Install anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in place work. Furnish templates and other devices needed for presetting of bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. C. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete‐ and masonry‐bearing surfaces of bond‐reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug‐tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage‐resistant grouts. D. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." E. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. F. Splice members only where indicated G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect. Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabricating errors in structural framing. Cut only secondary members not under stress acceptable to Architect. Should holes be required in addition to those provided in shop, provide such holes and strengthen area as required to compensate with approval of Architect. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as required to receive other work. Cut, drill or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High‐Strength Bolts: Install high‐strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened or Pretensioned. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built‐up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. SECTION 05 40 00 ‐ COLD‐FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold‐formed steel framing product and accessory. B. Delegated‐Design Submittal: For cold‐formed steel framing. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power‐actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in‐house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base‐metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic‐coating thickness. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code ‐ Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code ‐ Sheet Steel." D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold‐Formed Steel Framing ‐ Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." E. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 2. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 3. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 4. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company. 5. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold‐formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non‐Load‐Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 for non‐brittle finishes and 1/600 of the wall height for brittle wall finishes. b. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live loads and l/240 for total loads of the span. c. Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the horizontally projected span for live loads. d. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span for live loads and 1/240 for total loads of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C). 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm). 5. Design exterior non‐load‐bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. B. Cold‐Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213. C. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200. D. Fire‐Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.3 COLD‐FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H)] [ST50H (ST340H). 2. Coating: G60 (Z180. B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: 50 (340). 2. Coating: G60 (Z180). 2.4 EXTERIOR NON‐LOAD‐BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C‐shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base‐Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm), 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm), 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm), 0.0966 inch (2.45 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1‐3/8 inches (35 mm), 1‐5/8 inches (41 mm), 2 inches (51 mm), 2‐1/2 inches (63 mm)]. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U‐shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base‐Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1‐1/4 inches (32 mm), 2 inches (51mm). C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. b. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. c. Steel Network, Inc. (The). D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep‐leg, U‐shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base‐Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm), 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm), 0.0677 inch (1.72 mm), 0.0966 inch (2.45 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one‐story structures] [and] [1 inch (25 mm) plus twice the design gap for other applications E. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel‐framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. NO DESCRIPTION DATE B. Surface Retarder: Chemical set retarder, capable of temporarily delaying final hardening of newly placed concrete mixture to depth of reveal specified. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise indicated. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F, with maximum loss on ignition of 3 percent. 2. Metakaolin Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class N. 3. Silica Fume Admixture: ASTM C 1240, with optional chemical and physical requirement. 4. Ground Granulated Blast‐Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal‐Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project. 1. Face‐Mixture‐Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved by Architect. D. Lightweight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 330, with absorption less than 11 percent. E. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117. F. Air‐Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. G. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions or other salts by weight of admixture. 1. Water‐Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water‐Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. Water‐Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. 5. High‐Range, Water‐Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 6. High‐Range, Water‐Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 7. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017 M. H. Pigment: Precast units to match selected dark grey brick. Basis of design: Face Brick 2 – Midnight Black. Pigment to be Solomon colors or equal. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Precast Accessories: Provide clips, hangers, plastic or steel shims, and other accessories required to install architectural precast concrete units. 2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required. 1. Limit use of fly ash and silica fume to 20 percent of portland cement by weight; limit metakaolin and silica fume to 10 percent of portland cement by weight. B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option. C. Limit water‐soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M. D. Normal‐Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion full‐depth mixture, at fabricator's option, by either laboratory trial batch or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project, to provide normal‐weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum. 2. Maximum Water‐Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to PCI MNL 117. F. Add air‐entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117. G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2.6 MOLD FABRICATION A. Molds: Accurately construct molds, mortar tight, of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete‐placement operations and temperature changes and for prestressing and detensioning operations. Coat contact surfaces of molds with release agent before reinforcement is placed. Avoid contamination of reinforcement and prestressing tendons by release agent. 1. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid backing and supports to maintain stability of liners during concrete placement. Coat form liner with form‐release agent. B. Maintain molds to provide completed architectural precast concrete units of shapes, lines, and dimensions indicated, within fabrication tolerances specified. 1. Form joints are not permitted on faces exposed to view in the finished work. 2. Edge and Corner Treatment: Uniformly chamfered. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials that reduce or destroy the bond with concrete. When damage to epoxy‐coated reinforcing exceeds limits specified in ASTM A 775/A 775M, repair with patching material compatible with coating material and epoxy coat bar ends after cutting. 2. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concrete‐placement and consolidation operations. Completely conceal support devices to prevent exposure on finished surfaces. 3. Place reinforcement to maintain at least 3/4‐inch minimum coverage. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces. 4. Place reinforcing steel and prestressing strand to maintain at least 3/4‐inch minimum concrete cover. Increase cover requirements for reinforcing steel to 1‐1/2 inches when units are exposed to corrosive environment or severe exposure conditions. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position while placing concrete. Direct wire tie ends away from finished, exposed concrete surfaces. 5. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh spacing and wire tie laps, where required by design. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 6. Galvanize where precast units are exposed to weather. B. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and erection stresses. C. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no additional water may be added. D. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing cover specified. E. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from forming in precast concrete units. 1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face‐mixture concrete. F. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built‐in items, and minimize pour lines, honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures complying with PCI MNL 117. 1. Place self‐consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR‐6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self‐Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." G. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot‐ and cold‐weather concrete placement. H. Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit on a surface that will not show in finished structure. I. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low‐pressure live steam or radiant heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product. J. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval. 2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast‐in items. 2.9 FINISHES A. Precast unit faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners, including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed‐face surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved mockup and as follows: 1. As‐Cast Surface Finish: Provide surfaces free of pockets, sand streaks, and honeycombs. B. Surface Sealer: VOC compliant, 40 percent silane sealer, non‐darkening, no surface film. Seal prior to applying protective wrap and delivery to site. 1. Dayton Superior "Weather Worker S‐40." 2. Acceptable Substitution. 2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality‐Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117 requirements. If using self‐consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to PCI TR‐6, "Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self‐Consolidating Concrete in Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." 1. Perform water absorption test. 2. Perform air entrainment test on each set of test cylinders. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting structural frame or foundation and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, true and level bearing surfaces, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable tolerances. 1. Install temporary steel or plastic spacing shims or bearing pads as precast concrete units are being erected. 2. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection progresses. B. Set units on top of ice and waterguard membrane using shims to provide correct mortar joint height. Apply sealant to all penetrations through ice and waterguard membrane prior to setting of precast units. Remove shims when epoxy is dry and before sealant operation. C. Exposed Joint Dimension: 3/8 inch, maintain uniform joints. Set units in mortar, raking joints back for sealant installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I. B. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and true, without exceeding the following noncumulative erection tolerances: 1. Maximum Jog in Alignment of Matching Edges: 1/8 inch. 2. Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Repairs not allowed. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view. B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately. C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains. 1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials. 3. Apply additional coat of surface sealer to completed installation. SECTION 04 20 00 ‐ UNIT MASONRY PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net‐area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net‐area compressive strength of masonry from average net‐area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit‐strength method) according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 2. All structural masonry f’m=1,900 psi minimum. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. 3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 4. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. 5. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 6. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Drawings must include wall elevations of all structural walls. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end‐dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Weep holes. 3. Accessories embedded in masonry. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units: Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. a. Data on material properties. b. For brick, include size‐variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net‐area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Pre‐blended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net‐area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net‐area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Required f’m=1,900 psi. D. Cold‐Weather and Hot‐Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installing contractor must have not less than five years of experience, demonstrating successful projects of a similar type. 1. Provide three references who may be contacted for additional information. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. E. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather‐resistant membrane. 2. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. G. Use only skilled masons experience in masonry trade. Remove masonry mechanics not possessing proper skills at request of Architect and remove and replace unsatisfactory work as directed. H. Do not install insulation or interior vapor barrier and finish until the exterior of the building is completely dried in and sealed. For masonry veneer construction, this includes installation of veneer and sealants at all joints and penetrations. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain‐splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold‐Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold‐weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold‐Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot‐Weather Requirements: Comply with hot‐weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding manufacturing limits. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. A. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net‐area compressive strength of 1,900 psi. 2. Density Classification: Lightweight unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size: Nominal 8 inch x 8 inch x 16 inch a. Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Grey/natural color with smooth face and small grain texture, suitable for paint finish. B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built‐in‐place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built‐in‐place lintels until cured. 2.3 BRICK A. Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216. 1. Basis of Design: Interstate Brick. Face Brick 1‐ Arctic White. Face Brick 2 – Midnight Black. Subject to compliance with requirements, comparable products from one of the following manufacturers may also be acceptable. a. Belden Brick. b. General Shale. c. Summit Brick. d. Acme Brick. 2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX. 4. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net‐area compressive strength of 3350 psi (23.10 MPa). 5. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 7. Face Brick: a. Modular brick: Actual Dimensions: 3‐5/8 inches wide by 2‐1/4 inches high by 7‐5/8 inches long. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type I. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. Colored‐Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. D. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. E. Cold‐Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick or equal. F. Water: Potable. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air‐entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water‐repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. 1. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. a. For all masonry, use Type S. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design products are listed below. Provide product specified, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., www.h‐b.com. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc., www.heckmannbuildingproducts.com. c. Wire‐Bond, www.wirebond.com. B. Reinforcement: 1. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. a. Interior Walls: Mill‐galvanized, carbon steel. b. Exterior Walls: Hot‐dip galvanized, carbon steel. c. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187‐inch (4.76‐mm) diameter. d. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187‐inch (4.76‐mm) diameter. e. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187‐inch (4.76‐mm) diameter. f. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. g. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m). 3. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single‐Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. 4. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: a. Adjustable (two‐piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle‐and‐eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1‐1/4 inches (32 mm). Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe, with at least 5/8‐inch (16‐mm) cover on outside face. b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: #270‐2X‐SH Ladder. C. Adjustable Masonry‐Veneer Anchors: 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100‐lbf (445‐N) load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch (1.3 mm). 2. Wire Ties: Triangular‐, rectangular‐, or T‐shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.187‐inch‐ (4.76‐mm‐) diameter, hot‐dip galvanized‐steel wire unless otherwise indicated. 3. Screw‐Attached, Masonry‐Veneer Anchors for use at concrete or metal stud backup. a. Products: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: HB‐213‐2X SH. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". B. Flexible Flashing: Provide flexible flashing with stainless steel core with polymer fabric laminated to one face with non‐asphalt adhesive. Stainless Steel Type 304, ASTM A240. Product to have 10,000 psi minimum average tensile strength and 2,500 pounds average puncture resistance. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide York Manufacturing, Inc.; York Multi‐Flash SS or equal. 1. Accessories a. Mastic/sealant: Type: One part 100% solids, solvent‐free formulated silyl‐terminated polyether (STPE), ASTM C920‐11, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50. b. Outside corner and inside corner material; manufacturer’s standard available units using 26 gauge stainless steel. c. End dam: Product may be folded in line with the flashing material or utilize preformed end dams by manufacturer using 26 gauge stainless steel. d. Splice material: Standard self‐adhered metal material by the same flashing manufacturer or material matching system material with polyether sealant as a splice. a. Termination bar: Manufacturer's standard 1" composite material bar or a 1” 26 gauge stainless steel termination bar with sealant lip. A. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene, urethane or PVC. B. Bond‐Breaker Strips: Asphalt‐saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). C. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One‐piece, flexible extrusion made from UV‐resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro‐Vent or equal. D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free‐draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break II or equal. 1. Provide the following configuration: a. Strips, full‐depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings. E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148‐inch (3.77‐mm) steel wire, hot‐dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB‐Twin Rebar Positioner or equal. F. Adhesive: Type appropriate for substrate and acceptable to face brick manufacturer. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Manufacturer's standard‐strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.10 WATER REPELLENTS A. Anti‐Graffiti Coating: 1. Evonik Industries; "Protectosil Antigraffiti": www.evonik.com. 2. Prosoco "Block Guard and Graffiti Control": www.prosoco.com. 3. Seal‐Krete Inc., "Graffiti Barrier": www.seal‐krete.com. 4. Textured Coatings of America, "Graffiti Gard": www.texcote.com. 5. Acceptable Substitution: See Section 01 60 00 ‐ Product Requirements. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough‐in and built‐in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Coordinate installation of flashing shelf and thru‐wall flashing with installation of building insulation. B. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single‐wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. C. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. E. Use full‐size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor‐driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. F. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed‐joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement‐type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less‐than‐half‐size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. Where occurs, interior wythe shall course horizontally with exterior wythe. Transitions shall be made at internal corners. Unless otherwise shown, 3 brick courses shall lay to the same height as 1 CMU course to allow reinforcing to lay through both wythes at the same level. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4‐inch (100‐mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. Large‐size brick (Emperor brick) shall be laid at 1/3 running bond. D. Install bullnose units at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. E. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4‐inches (100‐mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4‐inch (100‐mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. F. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. G. Built‐in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built‐in items. H. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. I. Where built‐in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. J. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. K. Grouting to be low lift methods only, maximum lift height 4’‐0”. Grout shall be consolidated with mechanical vibration. L. Build non‐load‐bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2‐inch (13‐mm) clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non‐load‐bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead‐load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire‐rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Section 07 84 46 "Fire‐Resistive Joint Systems." NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush‐coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form‐ tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. E. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4‐inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. F. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. G. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 6.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive‐strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal‐weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. 8. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 9. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4‐inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 10. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 6.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. C. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive‐strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal‐weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of the Work. B. Buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area will be occupied. Conduct building demolition so operations of occupied buildings will not be disrupted. 1. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice of activities that will affect operations of adjacent occupied parts of the building. 2. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other facilities used by occupants of adjacent occupied parts of the building. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other facilities used by occupants of adjacent buildings without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 2. Review the list of items that the Owner intends to salvage prior to start of structure demolition, included in Paragraph 1.4 Materials Ownership, above. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work except as noted in memo below: PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving." PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Confirm in writing that Owner has completed removal of items of interest from areas involved with Structure Demolition. B. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction before starting demolition. C. Existing Utilities: See plumbing and electrical Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. D. Existing Streets: Document condition of existing streets with the City of Casper. Repair damage to city streets to the satisfaction of City authorities at end of project. E. Existing on‐site pavement: Document condition of existing on site pavement to remain. Repair damage to pavement to remain to the satisfaction of NCSD. F. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Existing Facilities: Protect adjacent walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during demolition operations. Maintain exits from existing buildings. B. Existing Utilities: Maintain utility services to remain and protect from damage during demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. a. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to occupants of affected buildings if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction and as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 1. Protect adjacent buildings and facilities from damage due to demolition activities. 2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain. 3. Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. 4. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 5. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. 6. Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations. 7. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust, noise, and dirt migration to occupied portions of adjacent buildings. D. Remove temporary barriers and protections where hazards no longer exist. Where open excavations or other hazardous conditions remain, leave temporary barriers and protections in place. 3.4 DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish indicated buildings and site improvements completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire‐suppression devices during flame‐cutting operations. 2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 24 hours after flame cutting operations. 3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 4. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris‐removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental‐protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution. C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. 3.5 DEMOLITION BY MECHANICAL MEANS A. Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. B. Remove debris from elevated portions of the building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact and dust generation. C. Below‐Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below‐grade construction. 1. Completely remove below‐grade construction, including basements, foundation walls, and drilled piers. D. Existing Utilities: Demolish and remove existing utilities and below‐grade utility structures. 1. Piping: Disconnect piping at unions, flanges, valves, or fittings. 2. Wiring Ducts: Disassemble into unit lengths and remove plug‐in and disconnecting devices. 3.6 SITE RESTORATION A. Below‐Grade Areas: Rough grade below‐grade areas ready for further excavation or new construction. B. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes to achieve grades per the grading site plan. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and the new grades shown on the drawings. 3.7 REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent buildings caused by demolition operations. B. Repair city roadways damaged by the work of this contract. 3.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA‐approved landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. See Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on‐site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Do not burn demolished materials. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began. 1. Clean roadways of debris caused by debris transport. SECTION 03 30 00 ‐ CAST‐IN‐PLACE CONCRETE PART 4 ‐ GENERAL 4.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. 2. Provide mix design for each concrete mix prior to any concreting operations. Mix designs shall be prepared by an independent testing/inspection laboratory or concrete manufacturer. Acceptance of mix design by the Architect in no way relieves the Contractor or his supplier of the responsibility for the performance of the concrete. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 4.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form‐release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Floor and slab treatments. 9. Bonding agents. 10. Adhesives. 11. Vapor retarders. 12. Semirigid joint filler. 13. Joint‐filler strips. 14. Repair materials. 15. Stain materials. 16. Liquid floor treatments. C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates[: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity]. D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances. E. Field quality‐control reports. 4.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Where not specifically indicated otherwise, polishing work shall be in accordance with the published standards of the Concrete Polishing Association of America (CPAA). B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI‐certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI‐certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. C. Polishing Contractor shall be a licensed installer for the product and system specified, with not less than 3 years experience. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready‐mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agencyqualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M. G. Contractor shall submit tickets for all concrete delivered to site and copy Architect. Tickets shall include the following information: 1. Quantity delivered. 2. Actual quantity of each material in batch. 3. Outdoor temperature in full sun and shade. 4. Time at which cement was added. 5. Time truck left plant, arrived on site and finished pour. 6. Numerical sequence of the delivery. 7. Quantity of water that can be added in the field based on mix design and quantity of water actually added. 8. Free moisture in fine and coarse aggregate in percent by weight. 9. Temperature of batch. 4.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures. 4.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer labels indicating brand name and directions for storage, mixing with other components and application. B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. C. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 4.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold‐Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot‐Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog‐spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 4.7 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty for Polished Finish: Manufacturer’s standard form, for 10 years. PART 5 ‐ PRODUCTS 5.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 117 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. 5.2 FORM‐FACING MATERIALS A. Rough‐Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. B. Form‐Release Agent: Commercially formulated form‐release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Formulate form‐release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form‐facing materials. C. Form Ties: Factory‐fabricated, removable or snap‐off glass‐fiber‐reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water‐barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 5.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one‐half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 60 percent. B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. C. Plain‐Steel Welded‐Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as‐drawn steel wire into flat sheets. 5.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain‐steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded‐wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete. 5.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F C. Normal‐Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse‐Aggregate Size: 1‐1/2 inches nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air‐Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water‐soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water‐Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water‐Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High‐Range, Water‐Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High‐Range, Water‐Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 5.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Micro‐Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro‐fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1‐1/2 inches long. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or equal: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; [PSI Fiberstrand 100] b. FORTA Corporation; [FORTA Econo‐Mono][FORTA Mighty‐Mono]. c. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. ‐‐ Conn.; Grace MicroFiber. 5.7 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, 15 mil, except with maximum water‐vapor permeance of 0.01 perms. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure‐sensitive tape. 1. Basis‐of‐Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier, by Stego Industries, or equal. 5.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. Provide L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; E‐CON, or equal. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture‐Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap‐polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane‐Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Prove L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; L&M CURE R or equal. F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane‐Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering. Provde L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; Dress & Seal WB or equal. G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane‐Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. Provide L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc; Lumiseal WB Plus or equal. 5.9 POLISHED FINISHING MATERIALS A. Concrete polishing system shall be based on materials and written procedures by L&M Construction Chemicals. Requests for Acceptable Substitution will considered during bidding. B. Hardener, Sealer, Densifier: L&M Construction Chemicals, FGS Hardener Plus. 1. Water based, containing no VOC’s, formulated to chemically harden and improve the density of concrete surfaces leaving no surface film. C. Joint Filler: L&M Construction Chemicals, Joint Tite 750. 1. Two component, self‐leveling, 100% solids, rapid curing polyurea joint filler with Shore 80 or higher hardness. D. Cleaning Solution: L&M Construction Chemicals, FGS Concrete Conditioner. 1. Mild, highly concentrated liquid concrete cleaner and conditioner containing wetting and emulsifying agents; biodegradable, environmentally safe and certified High Traction by NFSI. E. Oil and Water Repellent: L&M Construction Chemicals, Petrotex 1. Ready to use silane, siloxane and fluoropolymers blended water based solution sealer, quick drying, low‐odor, oil and water repellant, VOC compliant. 5.10 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion‐ and Isolation‐Joint‐Filler Strips: [ASTM D 1751, asphalt‐saturated cellulosic fiber] [or] [ASTM D 1752, cork or self‐expanding cork]. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two‐component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, [epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80] [aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95] according to ASTM D 2240. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two‐component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 5.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement‐based, polymer‐modified, self‐leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well‐graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than [4100 psi] <Insert strength> at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement‐based, polymer‐modified, self‐leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well‐graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than [5000 psi] <Insert strength> at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 5.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. See the Structural Drawings for Concrete Mix Designs. 5.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 5.14 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready‐Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M], and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1‐1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Agitate concrete materials continuously from time materials are placed in mixer until concrete is discharged. No additional water shall be added to mix after truck leaves batching plant without Architect's review and written acceptance. Each truck shall have time of departure from batching plant stamped on ticket. 3. Maximum mixing time shall be 1‐1/2 hour. Concrete mixed longer than 1‐1/2 hour will be rejected. PART 6 ‐ EXECUTION 6.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth‐formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough‐formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast‐concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust‐stained steel form‐facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike‐off templates or compacting‐type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form‐release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 6.2 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form‐removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28‐day design compressive strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form‐facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form‐ release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 6.3 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 6.4 VAPOR‐RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. 6.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded‐wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 6.6 JOINTS A. Contraction Joints in Slabs‐on‐Grade: Form weakened‐plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one‐fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond‐rimmed blades. Cut 1/8‐inch‐wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. B. Isolation Joints in Slabs‐on‐Grade: After removing formwork, install joint‐filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint‐filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full‐width joint‐filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint‐filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. C. At floors where exposed concrete is final finish, saw cut 1/4 inch wide joints to be filled full depth, allowing not less than 1 inch of filler, with joint filler by Section 07 92 00 contractor. Use small tool device to extend saw cut full length to adjacent walls. D. Allow a minimum of 90 days between the placing of floor slab and installation of joint filler. Thoroughly clean joints of all dirt, laitance and foreign materials. 1. Saw Cut Joints: Vacuum clean. 2. Construction Joints: Recut to 2 inches deep. Vacuum clean. E. Completely fill joints with filler to bottom of saw cuts without use of backer rod. If crack below saw cut needs to be filled to prevent filler loss, close crack with silica sand. Install filler per manufacturer's printed instructions. Clean residue with manufacturer's solvent. Do not open to traffic until filler has cured per manufacturer's printed instructions. 6.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high‐range water‐reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open‐textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 6.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull‐floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces [indicated] [and] [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes] <Insert locations>. C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power‐driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [exposed to view] [or] [to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin‐film‐ finish coating system] <Insert locations>. 2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10‐ft.‐ long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch. D. Trowel and Fine‐Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method]. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel‐finished floor surfaces. E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber‐bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 6.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in‐ place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel‐troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. 6.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold‐weather protection and ACI 301 for hot‐weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water‐fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12‐inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture‐Retaining‐Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture‐retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture‐retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture‐retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture‐retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. NO DESCRIPTION DATE N O P Q R V U W T E S AIR CONDITION AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ALTERNATE BID ITEM ALUMINUM AC ADA AFF ABI AL RADIUS, RISER THERMAL RESISTANCE RETURN AIR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN ROOF DRAIN ROOF DRAIN LEADER REFER TO REVISION ROUGH OPENING ROOF TOP UNIT R R‐____ RA RCP RD RDL RE: REV RO RTU BLDG BUR BUILDING BUILT UP ROOFING CB CJ CL CLR CMU COL CONC CONT CSWK CT COVE BASE CONTROL JOINT CENTER LINE CLEAR CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT COLUMN CONCRETE CONTINUE, CONTINUOUS CASEWORK CERAMIC TILE DOUBLE DETAIL DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIAMETER DIMENSION DOWN DISHWASHER DBL DTL DF DIA DIM DN DW EQ EF EXT EQUAL EXHAUST FAN EXTERIOR FACE TO FACE FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL FLOOR CLEAN OUT FLOOR DRAIN FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FINISH FIXTURE FLOOR FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FEET, FOOT F/F FA FAAP FCO FD FEC FIN FIXT FLR FRP FT GAGE GALVANIZED GLAZED CMU GA GALV GCMU HM HORIZ HT HVAC HOLLOW METAL HORIZONTAL HEIGHT HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING INSUL INT INSULATION INTERIOR L ANGLE, LENGTH MATERIAL MECHANICAL MINIMUM MISCELLANEOUS METAL MAT MECH MIN MISC MTL NOT IN CONTRACT NOMINAL NOT TO SCALE NIC NOM NTS ON CENTER OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OPPOSITE HAND OPPOSITE OVERFLOW ROOF DRAIN OC OFCI OH OPP ORD PLASTIC LAMINATE PAINT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PLAM PT PVC QTY QUANTITY SPECIFICATION STAINLESS STEEL STEEL STRUCTURAL SUSPEND SPEC SSTL STL STRUCT SUSP UNO UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE VAR VCT VERT VIF VTR VWC VARIES VINYL COMPOSITION TILE VERTICAL VERIFY IN FIELD VENT THROUGH ROOF VINYL WALL COVERING WOOD BASE WATER CLOSET WALL CLEAN OUT WOOD WIDE FLANGE WELDED WIRE FABRIC WB WC WCO WD WF WWF T&G T/O TYP TONGUE AND GROOVE TYPICAL E EA EJ EL ELEC ELEV EAST EACH EXPANSION JOINT ELEVATION ELECTRIC, ELECTRICAL ELEVATOR, ELEVATION SQUARE FOOT, FEET SUPPLY AIR SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE SIMILAR SLIP JOINT SF SA SAT SIM SJ B/O BOTTOM OF GB GYPSUM BOARD LAV LAVATORY MAS MASONRY MB MARKER BOARD N NORTH RB RUBBER BASE RT RUBBER TREAD VB VENTED BASE TOP OF CG CORNER GUARD CPT CARPET CS CLEAR SEALER (E) EXISTING FAF FLUID APPLIED FLOORING EPT EPOXY PAINT (N) NEW OP OPERABLE PARTITION S SOUTH W WEST TH SCONC SEALED CONCRETE MAX MAXIMUM OG OBSCURE GLASS RES RESILIENT FLOORING QT QUARRY TILE (R) RELOCATE(D) FACE OF FINISH FACE OF MASONRY FOF FOM FOS FACE OF STUD TB TACK BOARD OFOI OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED PRD PRIMARY ROOF DRAIN FV FIELD VERIFY SSM SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL RF RUBBER FLOORING MF MULTIPLE FINISHES PCONC POLISHED CONCRETE PLY PLYWOOD GRB GRAB BAR RAF RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING SPCMU SPLIT FACE CMU SGCMU STRUCTURAL GLAZED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT THICKNESS TBD TO BE DETERMINED SCONC SEALED CONCRETE PT‐2 FLOOR BASE WALL FINISH TAG MF= MULTIPLE FINISHES RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FLOOR / BASE FINISH TAG CG CONC CS CPT CT EPT FAF GFCMU GB MF PT PCONC PLY OP RB RES RAF RF RT SCONC SPCMU SSM STCONC CORNER GUARD CONCRETE CLEAR SEALER CARPET CERAMIC TILE EPOXY PAINT FLUID APPLIED FLOORING GROUND FACE CMU GYPSUM BOARD MULTIPLE FINISHES PAINT POLISHED CONCRETE PLYWOOD OPERABLE PARTITION RUBBER BASE RESILIENT FLOORING RESILIENT ATHLETIC FLOORING RUBBER FLOOR RUBBER TREAD SEALED CONCRETE SPLIT FACE CMU SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL STAINED CONCRETE 1. ALL SLOPES IN SHADED AREAS ARE DEVELOPED WITH TAPERED INSULATION. 2. ALL WOOD MEMBERS SHALL BE PRESERVATIVE TREATED. 3. ALL MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, EXHAUST FANS, AND SKYLIGHTS SHALL BE ON ROOF CURBS. ALL ROOF CURBS SHALL BE INSULATED AND THE VOID BENEATH ITEMS WITHIN THE CURB SPACE SHALL BE FILLED WITH INSULATION. 4. ALL CRICKETS ARE ANGLED 30 DEGREES MIN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. ALL CRICKET SLOPES ARE 3/8" PER 1'‐0" NET (3/4" PER 1'‐0" CRICKET ON 3/8" PER 1'‐0" ROOF EQUALS 3/8" PER 1'‐0" NET CRICKET SLOPE), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 6. ALL OBJECTS GREATER THAN 24" IN WIDTH ACROSS SLOPE SHALL HAVE CRICKETS TO DIVERT WATER AROUND THEM. 7. PROVIDE PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS AT ALL LAMB'S TONGUES AND DOWNSPOUTS ON ROOF AND AT GRADE. 8. INSTALL ROOF DRAIN LEADERS, FROM DRAIN ASSEMBLY TO DRAIN CHASE, AT MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ELEVATIONS WHILE MAINTAINING REQUIRED SLOPE. 9. ANYWHERE EXPOSED FASTENERS ARE USED IN THE ROOFING SYSTEM, COPING SYSTEM, EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEM, OR FLASHING SYSTEM, THEY SHALL UTILIZE SEALING WASHERS. ‐ PLOT DATE SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: PROJECT #: ARCHITECTS CONSULTANT T ‐ 970.484.0117 F ‐ 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524‐2913 © 2015 www.rbbarchitects.com 4/15/2016 9:16:39 AM A001 12‐31.34 ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201‐229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLILNS, CO 80524 CITY OF FT. COLLINS, COLORADO CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 04/07/2016 LEGEND MATERIAL LEGEND DRAWING KEYNOTES ABBREVIATIONS 6. SET FLOOR DRAINS 3/4" BELOW SURROUNDING TOP OF SLAB ELEVATION AND SLOPE FLOOR TO DRAINS, U.N.O. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ALL FLOOR DRAIN LOCATIONS AT TOILET ROOMS. 5. PROVIDE BLOCKING AT ALL ACCESSORIES (GRAB BARS, ETC.), HARDWARE WHERE REQUIRED, AND WALL HUNG CABINETS. 4. RE: WALL AND ROOF TYPE SHEET (A201) FOR WALL AND ROOF ASSEMBLIES. 3. INTERIOR DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF STUD, FACE OF MASONRY, OR FACE OF CONCRETE. WHERE DIMENSIONS ARE NOTED "CLEAR", DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISH FACE. 2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF DISCREPANCIES ARE DISCOVERED. 1. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS TO REVIEW ALL OF THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING ARCHITECTURAL, FOR WORK UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE CONTRACTS. NO EXTRAS WILL BE ALLOWED FOR WORK SHOWN IN ANY PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR DESCRIBED IN ANY PART OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. GENERAL NOTES ‐ PLAN TOTAL BUILDING 1 AREA: LEVEL ONE GROSS 398 SF FIRE PROTECTION: NOT SPRINKLED AREA SEPARATIONS: NONE OCCUPANCY: B NUMBER OF STORIES: ONE CONSTRUCTION TYPE: V GOVERNING CODE: 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE CODE SUMMARY 10. AT WALLS THAT RECEIVE TILE OR FRP, USE 5/8" CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD IN LIEU OF 5/8" GWB. RE: INTERIOR ELEVATIONS FOR TILE AND FRP LOCATIONS. 9. PROVIDE ACOUSTIC SEALANT AT ALL EDGES & PENETRATIONS THROUGH ACOUSTIC WALLS. 8. ALL REFERENCES TO UL & GA ASSEMBLY RATINGS ARE REPRESENTATIVE OF DESIGN INTENT. 7. REFERNCE DETAILS ON SHEET A002 FOR TOP OF WALL CONDITIONS. 6. BRAKE METAL EDGE ANGLES (INVERTED) ARE REQUIRED AT JOINTS BETWEEN TOP OF WALL AND ROOF DECK WHERE IT IS EXPOSED. BRAKE METAL SHALL BE 4" X 4" X 20 GA. U.N.O. AND FASTENED WITH SCREWS TO DECK @ 2'‐0" O.C. 5. PROVIDE 1/2" PLYWOOD BACKING BEHIND GYP. BOARD ON WALLS SCHEDULED TO RECEIVE SHELVING ON STANDARS AND BRACKETS, TYPICAL. 4. REFERENCE FINISH PLANS FOR LOCATION OF RECESSED CARPET BASE, TILE, FRP, AND OTHER SPECIAL DETAIL AND FINISH CONDITIONS. SHADING INDICATES WALL EXTENDS TO DECK (OR THROUGH SECOND FLOOR WHERE OCCURS). NO SHADING INDICATES WALL EXTENDS 3. REFERENCE REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR PARTITION HEIGHT. PARTITIONS ARE SHADED IN THE FOLLOWING MANNER: 2. REFERENCE CODE PLAN FOR ALL SMOKE AND FIRE RATED LOCATIONS. r =RATED CONDITION. PARTITION TO MEET FIRE RATING AS INDICATED ON COCE PLAN AND INCORPORATE FIRE RATING NOTES AND DETAILS ON SHEET A002. s =SMOKE CONDITION. PARTITION TO RESIST THE PASSAGE OF SMOKE AND INCORPORATE SMOKE NOTES AND DETAILS ON THIS SHEET. a = ACOUSTIC CONDITION. PARTITION TO MEET ACOUSITC RATING AND ACOUSTIC STANDARDS AS DEFINIED BY THE SPECIFICATIONS AND ACOUSTIC NOTES AND DETAILS ON THIS SHEET. 1. INTERIOR WALL TYPES ARE NOTED ON THE FLOOR PLANS WITH THE FOLLOWING SYBMOL: GENERAL NOTES ‐ WALL TYPES NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1/4" = 1'-0" FLOORING LEGEND 12" = 1'-0" ABBREVIATIONS‐ FINISHES GENERAL NOTES: ROOF PLAN 1. EPOXY PAINT, ALL INTERIOR WALLS, TYPICAL GENERAL NOTES ‐ FINISHES "H" "W" "L" "W" 2 1/2" CLR. 4" LONGITUDINAL LINTEL REINFORCING, "Tb" EXTENDING 2'-8" PAST EDGES OF OPENING. CONTINUOUS BOND BEAM AT HEAD OF OPENING WHERE NOTED. (PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF (2) #5 IF NOT SPECIFICALLY CALLED OUT) (2) #5 EXTENDING 2'-8" PAST EDGES OF OPENING. DO NOT LOCATE CONTROL JOINT WITHIN 1'-4" OF EDGE OF OPENING TYPICAL 2' - 8" MINIMUM SHEAR REINFORCEMENT (1) BAR w/ 180° HOOKS, (1) LEG TYPICAL TYPICAL FULL HEIGHT VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT TYPICAL MASONRY LINTEL CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE LINTEL MARK MAXIMUM OPENING LENGTH (L) HEIGHT OF SOLID GROUTED MASONRY LINTEL (H) GROUTED JAMB WIDTH (W) SIZE OF SHEAR REINFORCING SPACING OF SHEAR REINFORCING COMMENTS L1 4'-0" 1'-4" 0'-8" N/A N/A TYPICAL ALL OPENINGS SIZE OF LINTEL REINFORCING (Tb) (2) #4 LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 3 S102 4 S102 S102 5 B/PWD. AT WORKPOINT INTERIOR NON-BEARING WALLS SHALL NOT CONNECT TO EXTERIOR WALLS. PROVIDE JOINT BETWEEN INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR WALLS. CAULK PER ARCH. PLANS, TYPICAL S103 7 TYP. S103 3 TYP. B A 4' - 1 3/4" 5' - 7 1/2" 6 3/4" 110' - 6 3/8" 6 1/4" 12' - 10 5/8" 7' - 4 7/8" TO WORKPOINT 6' - 0 3/8" GRID B 4" / 12" 2" / 12" LEVEL 1 100' - 0" REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB, SEE PLAN NOTES FOR REINFORCEMENT REINFORCE PARTITION WALLS w/ #4 VERTICAL AT CORNERS, WALL ENDS, OPENING JAMBS, AND AT 8'-0" O.C. MAX. #4 x 2'-6" DOWELS TO MATCH VERTICAL REINFORCING LOCATIONS IN WALL. DRILL AND EPOXY INTO S.O.G. WITH HILTI HY-200 w/ 4" MIN. EMBEDMENT. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS 8" NON-BEARING CMU PARTITION WALL. PROVIDE BOND BEAM w/ (1) #4 AT TOP OF WALL AND ABOVE ALL OPENINGS EQ EQ USE WIRE REBAR POSITIONERS TO SECURE VERTICAL BARS IN PLACE AT TOP, BOTTOM & INTERVALS NOT TO EXCEED 200 BAR DIAMETERS OR 10'-0" 1/4 HSS8X6X1/4 (LLH) TYP. PER PLAN HSS12X3X1/4 (LLV) A PLYWOOD DECKING PER PLAN ARCH. SEE DROP STEM WALL REINF. BELOW DOOR BLOCK-OUT. EXTEND REINF. 2’-6” BEYOND EDGES OF OPENING SLAB-ON-GRADE, SEE PLAN NOTES FOR SIZE AND REINFORCING . SLOPE EXTERIOR SLAB PER CIVIL T/S.O.G. SEE PLAN #4 x DOWELS AT 1’-0” O.C. ALTERNATE HORIZ. LEGS 25” 25” 2'-6" MIN. OPENING 2'-6" MIN. ELEVATION N.T.S. 8" 9" TYP. 1 1/2" TYP. 2" 6" 3" 6" 3" 9" 3/4" BASE PLATE w/ (4) 3/4"Ø ANCHOR RODS. SEE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION HSS4X4X3/8 12 / S103 EDGE OF CONC. 4" GRID TO EDGE OF CONC. 4" GRID TO 3 3/8" 2 5/8" 3" 3" 1 B CMU NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY DROP TOP OF CONCRETE (-)8" FOR COLUMN BEARING. T/CONC. 99'-4" AT BLOCKOUT COAT COLUMN w/ EMULSIFIED ASPHALTIC COATING WHERE COLUMN IS WRAPPED BY CMU 9" EMBED 1 1/2" SHIM TYPICAL ANCHOR BOLTS F1554-GR36 W/ SUPPLEMENT S1 HEX- HEAD BOLT W/ LEVELING NUTS. CONTRACTOR OPTION: ALL-THREAD ROD W/ NUT & WASHER TACK WELDED AT END BASE PLATE AND COLUMN PER PLAN AND DETAILS AND GROUT 1/4 = (-) 0'-8" CONCRETE BEARING CONCRETE FINISHED FLOOR ELEVATION LEVEL 1 100' - 0" S103 1 A B 7' - 4 7/8" 12' - 10 5/8" 6 1/4" 5' - 7 1/2" 4' - 1 3/4" 6 3/4" 15' - 4" 4' - 8" 4" 15' - 0" 4' - 4" 4" - PLOT DATE A A 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: PROJECT #: Architects, Inc. CONSULTANT B C D E A B C D E T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2012 www.rbbarchitects.com 3/7/2016 8:57:35 AM S103 2004 DETAILS OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLINS, CO 80524 CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO BRL ELR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 03.04.16 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 ROOF SUPPORT AT COLUMN 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 COLUMN CONNECTION AT TOP OF CMU 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 3 ROOF BEAM CONNECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 MASONRY LINTEL SCHEDULE 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 BUILDING CROSS SECTION-WEST 1" = 1'-0" 7 TYPICAL INTERIOR NON-BEARING MASONRY PARTITION 1" = 1'-0" 8 TYPICAL MASONRY REBAR POSITIONERS 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 9 ROOF BEAM CONNECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 10 TYPICAL EXTERIOR DOOR THRESHOLD 1" = 1'-0" 11 TYPICAL COLUMN BASE PLATE LAYOUT 1/8" = 1'-0" 12 BASE PLATES 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 BUILDING CROSS SECTION-EAST NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1 90% PROGRESS 11.30.15 2 95% PROGRESS 01.05.16 3 100% CD 02.12.16 4 CONST. DOCS. 03.04.16 03-04-2016 STEP T/CMU WALL 8" 4" 14' - 4" 5' - 0" 4" 8" STEP T/CMU WALL BLOCKOUT TOP OF CONCRETE (-)8" FOR COLUMN BEARING, TYP. OF (4) LOCATIONS S102 9 S102 S102 S102 8 6 7 5 S103 21' - 11" 2' - 7 1/2" 16' - 8" 2' - 7 1/2" HSS8X6X1/4 (LLH) HSS12X3X1/4 (LLV) HSS12X3X1/4 (LLV) HSS12X3X1/4 (LLV) HSS8X6X1/4 (LLH) HSS12X3X1/4 (LLV) HSS12X3X1/4 (LLV) HSS12X3X1/4 (LLV) 600S162-43 AT 16" O.C. 600S162-43 AT 16" O.C. 600S162-43 AT 16" O.C. (2) 600S162-43 AT 16" O.C. BACK-TO-BACK HSS4X4X3/8 HSS4X4X3/8 HSS4X4X3/8 HSS4X4X3/8 19' - 4" 4 S102 4 S102 5 S102 5 S102 1 S103 3 S103 TYP. TYP. MITER CORNERS, TYPICAL S103 2 TYP. 9 S103 1 A B 2 6 S103 HSS8X6X3/8 (LLH) HSS6X6X1/4 CMU WALL 4' - 8" LEVEL 15' - 4" RAKED CMU WALL 108' - 8" T/CMU STEP T/CMU WALL RAKE CMU TO BOTTOM OF ROOF STRUCTURE STEP T/CMU WALL 14' - 8" RAKED CMU WALL CMU WALL 5' - 4" LEVEL 4" 4" 4" 4" STEP T/CMU WALL RAKE CMU TO BOTTOM OF ROOF STRUCTURE 108' - 8" T/CMU 16' - 0" 1' - 4" 4" 1' - 0" 15' - 8" 4" [SL] [SL] [SL] [SL] 2" / 12" 4" / 12" PROVIDE 1/2"Ø ACCESS HOLE CENTERED IN VERTICAL FACES OF HSS FOR CONDUIT AT 3RD POINTS, TYPICAL OF (4) BEAMS PLAN NOTES: 1. TYPICAL SLAB-ON-GROUND CONSTRUCTION: 5" CONCRETE SLAB ON 4" OF FREE, CLEAN DRAINING GRAVEL OVER ENGINEERED FILL. REINFORCE SLAB WITH #4 AT 18" O.C. CHAIRED TO MIDDLE OF SLAB. PROVIDE 1/8" x 1 1/4" DEEP SAWCUT CONTROL JOINTS AT 13'-0" O.C. MAXIMUM. COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS 2. TOP OF SLAB ELEVATION = 100'-0" 3. TOP OF FOUNDATION WALLS = 100'-0" U.N.O. ON PLAN 4. TYPICAL TOP OF FOOTING ELEVATION = 97'-6" U.N.O. ON PLAN 5. BLOCK OUT TOP OF CONCRETE FOUNDATION WALLS FOR STEEL COLUMN BEARING. TOP OF CONCRETE BLOCKOUTS AT STEEL COLUMNS = 99'-4". LEVEL 1 100' - 0" EQ. 1' - 4" EQ. 8" 3'-0" MIN. 8" 8" 1/2" COMPRESSIBLE MATERIAL SLAB ON GRADE PER PLAN NOTES #5 x DOWELS AT 24"O.C. ALTERNATE HOOK FULL HT. 10" 14" CONCRETE WALL: REINFORCE w/ (2) #5 TOP AND BOTTOM ADDITIONAL #5 BELOW BRICK LEDGE CONTINUOUS FOOTING, SEE PLAN AND SCHEDULE FOR SIZE AND REINFORCING 8" CMU WALL: REINFORCE w/ #5 AT 48" O.C. VERTICAL BOND BEAMS w/ (2) #4 AT 108'-8", TOP OF WALL, AND ABOVE DOOR OPENINGS 1 T/FTG. SEE PLAN 1' - 0" 4" PLAN NOTES: 1. TYPICAL ROOF CONSTRUCTION: ARCHITECTURAL INSULATION OVER 3/4" T&G PLYWOOD APA 48/24 RATED ON 6" COLD-FORMED ROOF JOISTS SPANNING TO STEEL HSS BEAMS. ATTACH PLYWOOD DECKING w/ SIMPSON PPSD SERIES #10 WOOD TO STEEL SCREWS AT 6" O.C. AT ALL PANEL EDGES AND AT 6" IN PANEL FIELD. 2. SEE BUILDING SECTIONS FOR ADDITIONAL DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION FOR PLACEMENT OF STEEL MEMBERS AND ROOF GEOMETRY. 3. SEE 4/S103 FOR MASONRY LINTEL REINFORCING REQUIREMENTS 4. SEE 3/S103 FOR ROOF STEEL WORK POINT AND SLOPES 8" CMU WALL, REINFORCE PER 3 / S102 BOND BEAM, REINFORCE w/ (2) #4, TYPICAL AT TOP OF WALL AND ABOVE OPENINGS VENEER PER ARCH. ROOF SHEATHING PER PLAN NOTES 6" ROOF JOISTS PER PLAN 6" BLOCKING at 24" O.C., TYPICAL (2) BAYS DIRECTLY ABOVE CMU WALL OR WINDOW SYSTEM RAKE CMU WALL TO B/STRUCTURE HSS BEAM PER PLAN 6" ROOF JOIST TIGHT TO HSS BEAM. ATTACH TO HSS w/ (1) 0.157"Ø P.A.F. AT 12" O.C. STAGGERED T&B T/STL. VARIES T/BOND BM. 108'-8" PROVIDE 3/4" MIN. JOINT BETWEEN T/CMU AND B/STRUCTURE GRID TSN VERTICLIP SL600 AT 48" O.C., MAX. ATTACH w/ (3) #10 SDST SCREWS TO BLOCKING & (2) 1/4" TITEN SCREWS w/ 1 1/2" MIN. EMBED T/CMU SEE PLAN 8" CMU WALL, REINFORCE PER 3 / S102 BOND BEAM, REINFORCE w/ (2) #4, TYPICAL AT TOP OF WALL AND ABOVE OPENINGS VENEER PER ARCH. WINDOW PER ARCH. SHEATHING PER ARCH. HSS PER PLAN ROOF SHEATHING PER PLAN HSS PER PLAN SIMPSON LS50, ATTACH TO HSS w/ (2) 0.157"Ø P.A.F. & TO STUD w/ (3) #10 SDST SCREWS, TYP. 6" ROOF JOIST PER PLAN A TO B/STUDS 1 1/2" B/HSS LEVEL 1 100' - 0" B A 4' - 8" 15' - 4" 4" 4" L1 STEP CMU 108' - 8" REINFORCE 8" CMU WALL w/ #5 AT 48" O.C. MAX. VERTICAL BOND BEAM w/ (2) #4 AT 108'-8" AND AT TOP OF WALL, TYP. 7' - 4" 3' - 4" 9' - 4" 7' - 4" 1' - 4" RAKE CMU AT PITCH OF ROOF #5 ADJACENT TO STEEL COLUMN, TYPICAL LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 5 S103 5 S102 1 S103 9 S103 2 1 6 S103 108' - 8" STEP CMU 1' - 4" 16' - 0" 1' - 4" 3' - 4" 8' - 0" 3' - 4" 1' - 4" 7' - 4" 1' - 4" L1 L1 BOND BEAM w/ (2) #4 AT 108'-8" REINFORCE 8" CMU WALL w/ #5 AT 48" O.C. MAX. VERTICAL #5 ADJACENT TO STEEL COLUMN, TYPICAL LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 3 S102 4 S102 A B 108' - 8" RAKE CMU AT PITCH OF ROOF STEP CMU REINFORCE 8" CMU WALL w/ #5 AT 48" O.C. MAX. VERTICAL BOND BEAM w/ (2) #4 AT 108'-8" AND AT TOP OF WALL, TYP. 5' - 4" 14' - 8" 20' - 0" #5 ADJACENT TO STEEL COLUMN, TYPICAL LEVEL 1 100' - 0" 5 S103 3 S103 1 2 6 S103 108' - 8" L1 L1 L1 REINFORCE 8" CMU WALL w/ #5 AT 48" O.C. MAX. VERTICAL BOND BEAM w/ (2) #4 AT 108'-8" 1' - 4" 3' - 4" 2' - 8" 3' - 4" 2' - 0" 3' - 4" 1' - 4" 1' - 4" 16' - 0" 7' - 4" 1' - 4" #5 ADJACENT TO STEEL COLUMN, TYPICAL - PLOT DATE A A 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: PROJECT #: Architects, Inc. CONSULTANT B C D E A B C D E T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2012 www.rbbarchitects.com 3/7/2016 8:57:34 AM S102 2004 FOUNDATION PLAN, ROOF FRAMING PLAN, DETAILS, AND ELEVATIONS OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLINS, CO 80524 CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO BRL ELR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 03.04.16 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 FOUNDATION PLAN 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 ROOF FRAMING PLAN 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 TYPICAL FOUNDATION SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 TYPICAL ROOF EDGE SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 5 TYPICAL ROOF EAVE SECTION CONTINUOUS FOOTING SCHEDULE MARK LENGTH WIDTH "B" THICKNESS "T" REINFORCING COMMENTS F24 CONTINUOUS 2' - 0" 12" (2) #5 CONTINUOUS ISOLATED FOOTING SCHEDULE MARK Width Length Thickness REINFORCING COMMENTS F3.0 3' - 0" 3' - 0" 1' - 0" (4) #5 EACH WAY BOTTOM 1/4" = 1'-0" 6 EAST ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" 7 NORTH ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" 8 WEST ELEVATION 1/4" = 1'-0" 9 SOUTH ELEVATION NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1 90% PROGRESS 11.30.15 2 95% PROGRESS 01.05.16 3 100% CD 02.12.16 4 CONST. DOCS. 03.04.16 03-04-2016 Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, reinforcement to be welded shall be ASTM 706 grade 60 reinforcing. At splices, lap bars 50 diameters unless noted otherwise. At corners and intersections, make horizontal bars continuous or provide matching corner bars. Provide standard hooks on bars terminating at a concrete face unless noted otherwise on plan. Around openings in walls and slabs, provide 2-#5, extending 2'-0 beyond edge of opening. In continuous members, splice top bars at mid-span and splice bottom bars over supports. Provide intermittent shear keys at all construction joints and elsewhere as shown on the drawings. Except as noted on the drawings, concrete protection for reinforcement in cast-in-place concrete shall be as follows: a. Cast against and permanently exposed to earth 3" b. Exposed to earth or weather: #6 through #18 bars 2" #5 bar, W31 or D31 wire, and smaller 1-1/2" c. Not exposed to weather or in contact with ground: Slabs, walls, joists: #11 bar and smaller 3/4" Beams, columns: Primary reinforcement 1-1/2" Stirrups, ties, spirals 1-1/2" Anchor bolts and rods for beam and column-bearing plates shall be placed with setting templates. Permanent corrugated steel forms for concrete floor slabs shall be manufactured and erected according to the "Specifications and Code of Standard Practice" of the Steel Deck Institute. Concrete shall not be placed until reinforcing and embedded items have been inspected by a qualified special inspector employed by the owner in accordance with IBC Section 1704.4. Earth formed trenches shall not be used. LIGHT GAUGE STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING: Member forming shall conform to American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Structural Steel Members (NAS-01), including the 2004 supplement.Specifications. All structural framing (studs, joists, track, runners, bracing, and bridging) shall be galvanized sheet steel conforming to ASTM A1003-02a, and galvanized to G-60. Studs and joists 54 mils (16 gauge) and heavier shall be 50 ksi yield. 43 mils (18 gauge) and lighter shall be, 33 ksi yield. Subcontractor shall provide bridging and blocking at a maximum of 4 foot spacing or as required for stability and stiffness of the final assembly. Supplier shall design required lintels and headers at openings where not specifically detailed. Member sizes noted on drawings are in the SSMA standard nomenclature: (##d)(sd)(##w)-(##t) (##d) Member Depth (inches.hundredths) (sd) Style Designation(see Style Designation in table below) (##w) Flange Width (inches.hundredths) (##t) Material Thickness (mils) (see Mils vs equivalent Gauge in table below) (sd) Style Designation Member Type (##t) Mils Thickness Equivalent Gauge S Punched C-Section 18 25 J Unpunched C-Section 27 22 T Track 30 20 – Drywall U Channel 33 20 – Structural F Furring Channel 43 18 54 16 68 14 97 12 FIELD VERIFICATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS: Contractor shall thoroughly inspect and survey existing structure to verify conditions that affect the work shown on the drawings. Contractor shall report any variations or discrepancies to the Architect before proceeding. Contract documents have been prepared using limited site observations. During construction, the contractor may encounter existing conditions which are not now known or are variance with project documentation (discovery). contractor shall notify the engineer of all conditions not per the contract Documents. examples include: sizes or dimensions other than those shown. damage or deterioration to materials or components. conditions of instability or lack of support. items noted as existing on the drawings but not found in the field include, but are not limited to: Contractor shall prepare dimensional drawings of all discovered items. Contractor shall field verify all existing structural conditions prior to submitting shop drawings. Contractor shall make allowance for the resolution of such discoveries in the construction schedule. STRUCTURAL ERECTION AND BRACING REQUIREMENTS: The structural drawings illustrate the completed structure with elements in their final positions, properly supported and braced. These construction documents contain typical and representative details to assist the contractor. Details shown apply at all similar conditions unless otherwise indicated. Although due diligence has been applied to make the drawings as complete as possible, not every detail is illustrated, nor is every exceptional condition addressed. All proprietary connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. All work shall be accomplished in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with the applicable code and local ordinances. The general contractor is responsible for coordination of all work, including layout and dimension verification, materials coordination, shop drawing review, and the work of subcontractors. Any discrepancies or omissions discovered in the course of the work shall be immediately reported to the architect for resolution. Continuation of work without notification of discrepancies relieves the architect and engineer from all consequences. Unless otherwise specifically indicated, the drawings do not describe methods of construction. The contractor, in the proper sequence, shall perform or supervise all work necessary to achieve the final completed structure, and to protect the structure, workmen, and others during construction. Such work shall include, but not be limited to, bracing, shoring for construction equipment, shoring for excavation, formwork, scaffolding, safety devices and programs of all kinds, support and bracing for cranes and other erection equipment. Do not backfill against basement or retaining walls until supporting slabs and floor framing are in place and securely anchored, unless adequate bracing is provided. Temporary bracing shall remain in place until all floors, walls, roofs and any other supporting elements are in place. The architect and engineer bear no responsibility for the above items, and observation visits to the site do not in any way include inspection of them. Precautionary Notes on Structural Behavior : A. Interior finish detailing must accommodate the differentials in relative movement of supporting structures. B. Roof spans are quite long, and applied loading naturally causes substantial deflection. Interior elements hung from the roof will deflect with the roof. C. The floor is a structural slab on steel deck and will have movement during the placement of concrete during construction. The concrete deck may not be uniform accross structure as a result. D. Exterior wall assembly is hung from the edge of the building structure and is directly affected to some degree by changes in external temperature and floor or roof deflection. Finish details should allow for relative movement between elements with different support conditions. SHOP DRAWINGS: Construction Documents are copyrighted and shall not be copied for use as erection plans or shop details. Use of Larsen Structural Design's electronic files as base for shop drawings requires prior approval by Larsen Structural Design, signed release of liability by subcontractor, and deletion of Larsen Structural Design’s name and Logo from all sheets so used. The General Contractor and his subcontractors shall submit in writing any requests to modify the plans or specifications. All shop and erection drawings shall be checked and stamped by the General Contractor prior to submission for Engineer's review. Unchecked submittals will be returned without review. Furnish one (1) print and one (1) electronic copy of shop and erection drawings to the Structural Engineer for review prior to fabrication for: concrete mix designs, reinforcing steel, structural steel, Submit in a timely manner to permit ten (10)working days for review. Shop drawings submitted for review do not constitute "request for change in writing" unless specific suggested changes are clearly marked. In any event, such changes by means of the shop drawing submittal process become the responsibility of the one initiating such change. STRUCTURAL STEEL: Structural steel shall be detailed, fabricated, and erected in accordance with the "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" (AISC 360-05) and the "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Building and Bridges" (AISC 303-05), by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC). Structural steel wide flange beams shall conform to ASTM A992. Other rolled shapes, including plates, channels, and angles shall conform to ASTM A36. Hollow structural section (HSS) tube shapes shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B, 46 ksi yield. Pipe shapes shall conform to ASTM A53 Grade B. Except as noted, framed beam connections shall be bearing-type with 3/4" diameter, snug tight, A325-N bolts, detailed in conformance with the Structural Drawings and the "Steel Construction Manual" by AISC, 13th Edition. Install bolts in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts", 2004. All beams shall have full depth web stiffeners each side of webs above and below columns Anchor rods shall conform to ASTM F1554, Grade 36 (or high strength Gr 55 or Gr 105 as noted), with weldability supplement S1. Headed anchor studs (HAS) shall be attached to structural steel with equipment approved by the stud manufacturer according to the stud manufacturer's recommendations. Welding shall be done by a certified welder in accordance with AISC and AWS specifications and recommendations using E70- electrodes. Where not specifically noted, minimum weld shall be 3/16” fillet by length of contact edge. All post-installed anchors shall have current International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) reports and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Expansion anchors shall be approved “wedge” type unless specifically noted to be “sleeve” type and shall have current ICC-ES Report. Chemical anchors shall be approved epoxy or similar adhesive type and shall have current ICC-ES Report. Where base material is not solid, approved screen tubes shall be used. Grout beneath column base and beam-bearing plates shall be minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7,500 psi, approved non- metallic,non-shrink, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1107 Grade B or C at a flow cone fluid consistency of 20 to 30 seconds. STRUCTURAL MASONRY: Design is based on ACI 530-05/ASCE5-05/TMS402-05 "Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures," Allowable Stress Design. Compressive strength of masonry assembly used for design is 1500 psi, based on net-bedded area. Hollow load-bearing concrete masonry (CMU) shall be lightweight units conforming to ASTM C90, Grade N, minimum compressive strength 1,900 psi based on average net area. Mortar shall be Type S conforming to ASTM C270-04. Masonry cement shall not be used. Provide full shoved mortar in all head and bed joints. Admixtures shall not be added for any reason unless approved by the Architect or Structural Engineer. Except for lintels, bond beam units shall be produced from standard vertically voided units with pre-cut knockout cross walls. Grout used in masonry walls and block cells shall be coarse grout, as defined by ASTM C476, with a minimum cube strength = 2,000 psi or 3000 psi concrete using 3/8" diameter aggregate and placed by vibrating unless an approved self consolidating mix is used. Low lifts shall not exceed five feet in height. If grout pour height exceeds 5 feet, clean-out holes shall be provided. Space continuous horizontal joint reinforcing at 16" maximum in all CMU walls. Joint reinforcing shall be welded type with 9 gage side-wires and 9 gage trussed or ladder cross wires. Reinforcing bars shall be as for reinforced concrete except as noted. At splices, lap bars 48 diameters. Provide reinforced grouted vertical cells at corners, ends of walls, jambs of openings, each side of vertical control joints, and at spacing shown on drawings. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior to grouting by wire bar locators or other suitable devices at intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters or 10 feet. Where noted on the drawings, provide clearance between masonry and structural elements, or wrap steel with polyethylene film. Provide vertical control joints in all masonry walls as located on architectural drawings or at 25'-0 maximum spacing. Submit for review Certificates for materials used in masonry construction indicating compliance with the contract documents Special Inspection is required by design. See Special Inspection Notes. Quality Assurance Level B Test specimens shall be made by the masons, at the direction of the owner's representative, with materials and techniques currently being used in the wall. Specimens shall be protected and field cured for 48 hours before being transported to a testing agency. The testing agent will be hired by the owner and shall be responsible for laboratory care and curing of specimens, testing, and reporting results to the owner, contractor, architect, and engineer in accordance with ASTM E447-92 LOOSE LINTELS: Unless noted otherwise, provide loose lintels as follows: (One angle for each 4" of wall thickness to bear 6" minimum each end). Openings up to 4'-0: Angle 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 1/4 Openings 4'-1 to 5'-4: Angle 5 x 3-1/2 x 1/4 Openings 5'-5 to 6'-6: Angle 6 x 3-1/2 x 5/16 STRUCTURAL WOOD SHEATHING: Plywood sheathing shall be APA graded with panel identification index, thickness, and nailing as noted on the drawings. • Screw roof sheathing with #10 self drilling self tapping (SDST) screws at panel edges and at intermediate framing as noted on plan • Minimum (3)-#10 SDST per roof joist. COMPONENT AND CLADDING WIND PRESSURES ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 1.33 1.33 1.33 26.0 26.0 26.0 225.0 0.200 0.700 0.200 -1.100 -1.200 -1.200 10.0 10.0 10.0 -18.3 -19.7 -19.7 WIDTH (FT) SPAN (FT) AREA (FT^2) MAX GCp MIN GCp MAX P (psf) MIN P (psf) ZONE 5 ZONE 4 1.33 1.33 8.67 8.67 25.1 25.1 0.84 -1.260 -1.030 14.53 14.53 -20.6 -17.3 0.84 NOTES: 1. LOADS SHOWN ARE ALLOWABLE (ASD) 225.0 225.0 REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF SOILS VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS DURING TASK LISTED TABLE RECREATED FROM IBC 2012 TABLE 1705.6 PERIODICALLY DURING TASK LISTED 1. VERIFY MATERIALS BELOW FOUNDATIONS ARE ADEQUATE TO ACHIEVE THE DESIGN BEARING CAPACITY. -- X 2. VERIFY EXCAVATIONS ARE EXTENDED TO PROPER DEPTH AND HAVE REACHED PROPER MATERIAL. -- X 3. PERFORM CLASSIFICATION AND TESTING OF COMPACTED FILL MATERIALS. -- X 4. VERIFY USE OF PROPER MATERIAL, DENSITIES AND LIFT THICKNESSES DURING PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION OF CONTROLLED FILL. X -- 5. PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF CONTROLLED FILL, OBSERVE SUBGRADE AND VERIFY THAT SITE HAS BEEN PREPARED PROPERLY. -- X REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD IBC REFERENCE 1. INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL, INCLUDING PRESTRESSING TENDONS, AND PLACEMENT. -- X ACI 318: 3.5, 7.1-7.7 1910.4 2. INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL WELDING IN ACCORDANCE WITH (IBC) TABLE 1705.2.2 ITEM 2b. -- -- AWS D1.4 ACI 318: 3.5.2 -- 3. INSPECTION OF ANCHORS CAST IN CONCRETE WHERE ALLOWABLE LOADS HAVE BEEN INCREASED OR WHERE STRENGTH DESIGN IS USED. -- X ACI 318: 8.1.3, 21.2.8 1908.5, 1909.1 5. VERIFY USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX. -- X ACI 318: CH 4, 5.2-5.4 1904.2, 1910.2, 1910.3 6. AT THE TIME FRESH CONCRETE IS SAMPLED TO FABRICATE SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP AND AIR CONTENT TESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CONCRETE. X -- ASTM C 172 ASTM C 31 ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8 1910.10 7. INSPECTION OF CONCRETE AND SHOTCRETE PLACEMENT FOR PROPER APPLICATION TECHNIQUES. X -- ACI 318: 5.9, 5.10 1910.6, 1910.7, 1910.8 8. INSPECTION FOR MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES. -- X ACI 318: 5.11-5.13 1910.9 9. INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE: A. APPLICATION OF PRESTRESSING FORCES. B. GROUTING OF BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS IN THE SEISMIC-FORCE- RESISTING SYSTEM. X X -- ACI 318: 18.20 ACI 318: 18.18.4 -- 10. ERECTION OF PRECAST MEMBERS. -- X ACI 318: CH. 16 -- 11. VERIFICATION OF IN-SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH, PRIOR TO STRESSING OF TENDONS IN POST- TENSIONED CONCRETE AND PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND STRUCTURAL SLABS. -- X ACI 318: 6.2 -- 12. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS OF TECH CONCRETE MEMBER BEING FORMED. -- X ACI 318: 6.1.1 -- TABLE RECREATED FROM IBC 2012 TABLE 1705.3 4. INSPECTION OF ANCHORS POST-INSTALLED IN HARDENED CONCRETE MEMBERS. -- -- ACI 318: 3.8.6, 8.1.3, 21.20.8 1909.1 b a. Where applicable, see also Section 1705.11, Special inspections for seismic resistance. b. Specific requirements for special inspection shall be included in the research report for the anchor issued by an approved source in accordance with ACI 355.2 or other qualification procedures. Where specific requirements are not provided, special inspection requirements shall be specified by the registered design professional and shall be approved by the building official prior to the commencement of the work. REQUIRED VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION AND INSPECTION CONTINUOUS PERIODIC REFERENCED STANDARD IBC REFERENCE 1. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: A. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS -- X APPLICABLE ASTM MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS; AISC 360, SECTION A3.3 -- B. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. -- X -- -- 2. INSPECTION OF HIGH STRENGTH BOLTING TABLE RECREATED FROM IBC 2012 TABLE 1705.2.2 A. BEARING-TYPE CONNECTIONS. -- X B. SLIP-CRITICAL CONNECTIONS X X AISC 360, SECTION M2.5 1704.3.3 3. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL: A. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS -- -- B. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED MILL TEST REPORTS. -- -- ASTM A 6 OR ASTM A 568 1708.4 ASTM A 6 OR ASTM A 568 4. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF WELD FILLER MATERIAL A. IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO AWS SPECIFICATIONS IN THE APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. -- -- B. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. -- -- AISC 360, SECTION A3.5 -- -- -- 5. INSPECTION OF WELDING: 1) COMPLETE AND PARTIAL PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS X -- AWS D1.1 1704.3.1 2) MULTIPASS FILLET WELDS X -- 3) SINGLE PASS FILLETS > 5/16" X -- 4) SINGLE PASS FILLETS ≤ 5/16" -- X 5) FLOOR AND ROOF DECK WELDS -- X AWS D1.3 -- A. STRUCTURAL STEEL: B. REINFORCING STEEL: -- -- AWS D1.3 -- 1) VERIFICATION OF WELDABILITY OF REINFORCING STEEL OTHER THAN ASTM A 706. -- X 2) REINFORCING STEEL-RESISTING FLEXURAL AND AXIAL FORCES IN INTERMEDIATE AND SPECIAL MOMENT FRAMES, AND BOUNDARY ELEMENTS OF SPECIAL REINFORCED CONCRETE SHEAR WALLS AND SHEAR REINFORCEMENT. X -- 3) SHEAR REINFORCEMENT. X -- 4) OTHER REINFORCING STEEL. -- X AWS D1.4 ACI 318: 3.5.2 -- 6. INSPECTION OF STEEL FRAME JOINT DETAILS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS: A. DETAILS SUCH AS BRACING AND STIFFENING B. MEMBER LOCATIONS. C. APPLICATION OF JOINT DETAILS AT EACH CONNECTION. -- -- -- X -- -- -- 1704.3.2 -- -- MINIMUM INSPECTION INSPECTION TASK CONTINUOUS PERIODIC IBC SECTION 2. As masonry construction begins, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Proportions of site-prepared mortar. TABLE REPRODUCED FROM TMS 602-11/ACI 530.1-11/ASCE 6-11 FREQUENCY REFERENCE FOR CRITERIA ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 b. Construction of mortar joints. d. Location of reinforcement, connectors, prestressing tendons and anchorages. e. Prestressing technique. c. Grade and size of prestressing tendons and anchorages. 4. The inspection program shall verify: a. Size and location of structural elements. b. Type, size and location of anchors, including other details of anchorage of masonry to structural members, frames or other construction. c. Specified size, grade and type of reinforcement. d. Welding of reinforcing bars. e. Preparation, construction, and protection of masonry during cold weather (temperature below 40°F) or hot weather (temperature above 90°F). f. Application and measurement of prestressing force. Sec. 2.1.7.7.2, 3.3.3.4(c), 8.3.3.4(b) 3. Prior to grouting, the following shall be verified to ensure compliance: a. Grout space b. Grade, type, and size of reinforcement and connectors, and prestressing tendons and anchorages. d. Proportions of site-prepared grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons. 5. Preparation of any required grout specimens, mortar specimens and/or prisms shall be observed. -- X -- X -- X -- X -- X -- X -- X X -- -- X X -- -- X -- X -- X X -- -- -- Art. 2.1, 2.6A -- -- Art. 3.3B -- -- -- -- -- -- Art. 3.3F -- -- -- Sec. 1.13 Art. 2.4, 3.4 -- -- -- -- -- Art. 3.6B -- -- Art. 3.2D, 3.2F -- Sec. 1.16 Art. 2.4,3.4 -- -- Art. 2.6B, 2.4G.1.b -- Art. 1.4 B.2.a.3, 1.4B.2.b.3, 1.4B.2.c.3, 1.4B.3, 1.4B.4 Sec. 1.16.4.3, 1.17.1 Sec. 2104.3, 2104.4 Art. 1.8C, 1.8D Sec. 2105.2.2.2, 2105.3 1. Verify compliance with the approved submittals. X Art. 1.5 f. Properties of thin-bed mortar for AAC masonry X -- -- -- Art. 2.1C Art. 2.4B, 2.4H Art. 3.4, 3.6A -- X -- -- Art. 3.6B g. Placement of grout and prestressing grout for bonded tendons is in compliance. X -- -- -- Art. 3.5, 3.6C h. Placement of AAC masonry units and construction of thin-bed mortar joints. X -- -- -- Art. 3.3B.8 c. Placement of reinforcement and anchor bolts, and prestressing tendons and anchorages. -- X -- Sec. 1.16 Art. 3.2E, 3.4, 3.6A e. Construction of mortar joints. -- X -- -- Art. 3.3B (a) Frequency refers to the frequency of inspection, which may be continuous during the task listed or periodically during the task listed, as defined in the table. (b) Required for the first 5000 feet of AAC masonry. (c) Required after the first 5000 feet of AAC masonry. MINIMUM TESTS Verification of Slump flow and Visual Stability Index (VSI) as delivered to the project site in accordance with Article 1.5 B.1.b.3 for self-consolidating grout MASONRY LEVEL B QUALITY ASSURANCE INSPECTION Verification of f'm and f'AAC in accordance with Article 1.4 B prior to construction, except where specifically exempted by the Code. ABBREVIATIONS: B/??? BOTTOM OF ELEMENT C.F.M.F. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING CLR. CLEAR COL. COLUMN DEFL. DEFLECTION FTG. FOOTING G.B. GRADE BEAM H.A.S. HEADED ANCHOR STUDS (E) EXISTING ELEMENT E.O.D. EDGE OF ROOF DECK E.O.S. EDGE OF SLAB LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL MAX. MAXIMUM MIN. MINIMUM O.H. OPPOSITE HAND O.H. OVERHANG (C&C LOAD TABLE) SIM. SIMILAR STL. STEEL T/??? TOP OF ELEMENT T&B TOP AND BOTTOM TYP. TYPICAL W.T.S. WELDED THREADED STUDS - PLOT DATE A A 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SHEET INFORMATION PROJECT INFORMATION PROJECT PHASE SEAL ARCHITECT REVISIONS ISSUE DATE: CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY: PROJECT #: Architects, Inc. CONSULTANT B C D E A B C D E T - 970.484.0117 F - 970.484.0264 315 East Mountain Ave Suite 100 Fort Collins, CO 80524-2913 © 2012 www.rbbarchitects.com 3/7/2016 8:57:31 AM S101 2004 GENERAL NOTES, SPECIAL INSPECTION TABLES, SHEET LIST OAK STREET RESTROOM BUILDING 201-229 S. COLLEGE AVE FT. COLLINS, CO 80524 CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO BRL ELR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 03.04.16 STRUCTURAL SHEET LIST SHEET NO. SHEET NAME S101 GENERAL NOTES, SPECIAL INSPECTION TABLES, SHEET LIST S102 FOUNDATION PLAN, ROOF FRAMING PLAN, DETAILS, AND ELEVATIONS S103 DETAILS NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1 90% PROGRESS 11.30.15 2 95% PROGRESS 01.05.16 3 100% CD 02.12.16 4 CONST. DOCS. 03.04.16 03-04-2016 84.17 FL 84.17 FL 84.07 FL 84.26 FL 84.58 FL 2.0% 2.0% 3.7% 1.6% 0.7% 0.7% 3.3% 3.4% 3.1% 3.7% 84.19 FL 84.67 84.63 84.63 FFE=84.75 84.59 TBC 84.72 TBC 84.57 TBC 84.69 TBC 84.57 TBC 84.67 TBC 84.67 TBC END TRANSITION FROM FLUSH CURB & GUTTER TO VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER END TRANSITION FROM VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER TO OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED 6" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER END TRANSITION FROM OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER TO FLUSH CURB & GUTTER BEGIN TRANSITION FROM OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER TO FLUSH CURB & GUTTER PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING TRANSFORMERS PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING BOLLARDS (TYP.) BEGIN TRANSITION FROM FLUSH CURB & GUTTER TO VERTICAL CURB &GUTTER END TRANSITION FROM FLUSH CURB & GUTTER TO VERTICAL CURB &GUTTER PROPOSED 6" VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER SAWCUT LINE PROPOSED 6" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED 7" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER 84.60 TC 84.75 TC 84.75 TC 84.75 TC 84.64 84.61 TBC 84.55 TBC 84.55 TBC PROPOSED HANDICAP RAMP WITH WARNING DOMES (TYP.) 2.0% SAWCUT LINE SAWCUT LINE 4.9% (85.54) TBC (85.64) TBC (85.40) FL (85.32) FL 85.51 TBC 85.51 TBC 4.9% MATCH INTO EXISTING AT NEAREST JOINT 2.7% 4.7% 2.1% 2.0% 2.0% BEGIN TRANSITION FROM VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER TO OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED 6" VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER 84.75 TC 2.0% 84.03 FL/TBC 84.54 TBC 3.4% 84.13 FL END 6" VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER / BEGIN FLUSH CURB & GUTTER END TRANSITION FROM FLUSH CURB & GUTTER TO OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER T T T T T T PROPOSED OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER 3.4% T PROPOSED 1.5' WIDE SIDEWALK CHASE @ 2.0% GRADE WITH METAL WAFFLE PLATE (SEE DETAIL) PROPOSED 1.5' WIDE SIDEWALK CHASE @ 2.0% GRADE WITH METAL WAFFLE PLATE (SEE DETAIL) PROPOSED BOLLARD PROPOSED BOLLARD BEGIN TRANSITION FROM FLUSH CURB & GUTTER TO VERTICAL CURB &GUTTER PROPOSED FLUSH CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED FLUSH CURB & GUTTER END TRANSITION FROM VERTICAL CURB &GUTTER TO FLUSH CURB & GUTTER BEGIN TRANSITION FROM VERTICAL CURB & GUTTER TO FLUSH CURB & GUTTER 12:1 2.0% 2.0% 84.65 TBC 84.65 FL/TBC TRANSITION FROM 6" TO 7" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED VERTICAL CURB WITH VARIABLE HEIGHT PROPOSED HANDICAP RAMP WITH WARNING DOMES (TYP.) PROPOSED FLUSH CURB & GUTTER BEGIN TRANSITION FROM FLUSH CURB & GUTTER TO OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER TG:84.67 INV:84.17 TG:84.75 INV:84.25 TG:84.70 INV:84.20 TG:84.67 INV:84.17 MATCH PROPOSED CURB FLOWLINE TO EXISTING ASPHALT FLOW LINE MATCH PROPOSED CURB FLOWLINE TO EXISTING ASPHALT FLOW LINE BEGIN VERTICAL CURB WITH VARIABLE HEIGHT END VERTICAL CURB WITH VARIABLE HEIGHT BEGIN 7" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER END 7" OUTFALL CURB & GUTTER ELEC ELEC E C.O. T T E E E E T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T E E E E E T T T G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G E E E T T T T T T T T T T E E E E E E E E SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS ELEC ELEC C S W W W W SS SS SS SS REMOVE EXISTING TREE REMOVE EXISTING TREE WELL REPLACE "PERMIT & 2 HOUR PARKING" SIGN REMOVE "PERMIT & 2 HOUR PARKING" SIGN REMOVE 1 STORY BRICK RESTROOM EXISTING 8" PVC SEWER SAWCUT LINE SAWCUT LINE SAWCUT LINE PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING TRANSFORMERS PRESERVE & PROTECT EXISTING BOLLARDS (TYP.) SAWCUT ALONG CONCRETE JOINT BETWEEN SIDEWALK AND TRANSFORMER PAD. EXISTING CLEANOUT EXISTING CURB STOP EXISTING WATER SERVICE EXISTING SEWER SERVICE Sheet Of 2 Sheets OAK STREET RESTROOMS These drawings are instruments of service provided by Northern Engineering Services, Inc. and are not to be used for any type of construction unless signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer in the employ of Northern Engineering Services, Inc. 200 South College Avenue, Suite 010 Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 ENGINEER ING N O R T H E RN PHONE: 970.221.4158 FAX: 970.221.4159 www.northernengineering.com C200 GRADING & DEMOLITION PLAN LEGEND: FIELD SURVEY BY: CALL 2 BUSINESS DAYS IN ADVANCE BEFORE YOU DIG, GRADE, OR EXCAVATE FOR THE MARKING OF UNDERGROUND MEMBER UTILITIES. CALL UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER OF COLORADO Know what'sbelow. Call before you dig. R ( IN FEET ) 0 1 INCH = 5 FEET 5 5 10 15 NOTES: SS G T E 77.71 (77.90) 1.8% (1.8%) EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DEMOLITION PLAN GRADING PLAN T RD RD RD CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROPOSED FLUSH CURB & GUTTER PROPOSED VERTICAL CURB WITH VARIABLE HEIGHT PROPOSED 6" BLUE OR WHITE DIAGONAL CROSS HATCH MARKINGS (SEE DETAIL) PROPOSED HANDICAP PARKING SIGN 16' PROPOSED HANDICAP MARKING PROPOSED BOLLARD 5.1' (SEE DETAIL) NORTHING: 130467.70 EASTING: 194989.08 (OUTSIDE FACE OF WALL) NORTHING: 130467.65 EASTING: 195007.75 (OUTSIDE FACE OF WALL) NORTHING: 130446.31 EASTING: 195007.69 (OUTSIDE FACE OF WALL) NORTHING: 130446.37 EASTING: 194989.02 (OUTSIDE FACE OF WALL) FL RADIUS = 5' FL RADIUS = 5' PROPOSED TBC PROPOSED FL & FC PROPOSED FL & FC PROPOSED TBC PROPOSED TBC 4.0' 1.5' FL RADIUS = 5' PROPOSED 4" WIDE BLUE OR WHITE LINE (SEE DETAIL) T Sheet Of 2 Sheets OAK STREET RESTROOMS These drawings are instruments of service provided by Northern Engineering Services, Inc. and are not to be used for any type of construction unless signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer in the employ of Northern Engineering Services, Inc. 200 South College Avenue, Suite 010 Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 ENGINEER ING N O R T H E RN PHONE: 970.221.4158 FAX: 970.221.4159 www.northernengineering.com C100 AND DETAILS HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN LEGEND: FIELD SURVEY BY: CALL 2 BUSINESS DAYS IN ADVANCE BEFORE YOU DIG, GRADE, OR EXCAVATE FOR THE MARKING OF UNDERGROUND MEMBER UTILITIES. CALL UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER OF COLORADO Know what'sbelow. Call before you dig. R ( IN FEET ) 0 1 INCH = 5 FEET 5 5 10 15 NOTES: HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN T or equivalent. (typical both sides) With curb walk, cover plate extends from property line to top of walk face. 6" VERTICAL CURB, GUTTER, AND SIDEWALK SECTION A-A (2 VIEWS) COMBINATION CURB, GUTTER, AND SIDEWALK center, Nelson Standard Anchor 3" #4 Bar Welded at 12" on L = 1 1/4" x 1 1/4" x 1/4" 5/8" Rolled Steel Tread Plate SECTION C-C 1.0' (minimum) approved by the Engineer. Right of Way line to flow line unless 2. Chase and cover plate run from 1. Length of steel plate varies. Notes: Dimension Variable (diamond pattern) 5/8" Rolled Steel Tread Plate 4'-0" or as Directed Retaining Screws at Top of Curb C B A C B PLAN VIEW A Street 10 3/8" SECTION B-B 6" 1 1/4" Attached Ft. Collins only Detached Sidewalk finish 12" on center Screw Brass or Electro-galv. 1/2" x 1" Flat Head Mach. threaded to receive screw. Angle iron to be drilled and screw to extend into the Concrete to be drilled to allow Lip of Gutter concrete (typical both sides). (typical both sides) F L Sidewalk X (Varies, See Plans Xmax=2.0') d (Varies, See Plans) 6" 2"R. 2" 6" 12" 1 1/2"R. 2'-6" 6" 4 1/2" VERTICAL Gutter edge may be tapered or battered. (Typical for all Curb & & Gutter Types) 6" UNLESS NOTED TYPICAL BOLLARDS Transition back of walk (typ.) Broom finish Broom finish SECTION A-A MID-BLOCK LOCATION Varies * 1:12 Slope (max.) 1:50 see note 2 Flowline (max.) Slope 1:12 5' A Varies * Wood float finish thru ramp Slope 1:12 Slope 1:12 CORNER LOCATION ramp finish thru Wood float Broom finish A Varies * (max.) A A 5' (max) (Radius varies) (typ.) back of walk Transition 2 Broom finish BACK OF WALK / LANDING Retaining Curb (Optional) 12" (max.) (min.) T Walk Curb Gutter NOTES: 1. T = Concrete thickness, 6" minimum for entire ramp area. 2. 1:50 Max unless a landing behind ramp (then ramp can be 1:12 with 1:20 on the detectable warning). 3. See CONST. DWG. 1606(a) and 1607 for Fort Collins. 4. Detectable Warning to extend the full width of the ramp. Material to be approved by Local Engineer. 5. 0" Curb height, See Section A-A. 6. Standard Curb and Gutter Section , See Standard Drawing 701. 2'-0" (min) 6" Walk Gutter Curb Varies * Detectable Warning 1/4" per ft. 1" per ft. 1" per ft. 1" per ft. 1" per ft. On a radius hold 6" at the corners of the truncated dome warning. 2" Retaining Curb (Optional) 6" * Curb to match slope of sidewalk, Ramp length not to exceed 15'-0" See Note 6 See Note 5 See Note 5 See Note 6 Detectable Warning, See Note 4 Detectable Warning, See Note 4 Retaining Curb (Optional) to retain ground behind the walk, if needed RD RD RD VAN- ACCESSIBLE REQUIRED PER SPACE ONE SIGN 8' 8' RESERVED PARKING R7-8 HANDICAP PARKING STALL NO PARKING HANDICAP PAVEMENT MARKINGS ABBREVIATIONS 6" 2"R. 2" 6" 6" 12" 1 1/2"R. 2'-6" 6" 4 1/2" Gutter edge may be tapered or battered. (Typical for all Curb & & Gutter Types) CURB AND GUTTER OUTFALL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Complete Systems: It is the intent of the Contract Documents that all systems, including mechanical and electrical, be complete and functional to provide the specified performance. The Contractor shall provide all incidental items, service, coordination and parts necessary to achieve this requirement. Provide correctly sized power, utilities, piping, drains, services and their connections to equipment and systems requiring them, whether or not specific items are listed in the schedules included in Division 22, 23 and 26. B. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land‐surveying services of the kind indicated. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on‐site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In‐Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in‐place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in‐place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in‐place materials. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water‐service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing‐in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." E. Protection: Operations performed in the course of the Work shall not cause deterioration or damage to other adjacent property or utilities, public or private, directly or indirectly. 1. Provide protection to sidewalks, curbs and gutters adjacent to project site. 2. Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and Architect when building or grounds are damaged by fire, wind, water, vandalism or construction activities. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Surveys: Contractor to conduct and maintain site survey; maintain controls, protect staking throughout project duration. Surveyor to be certified and licensed to conduct required survey in the State of Colorado. Project Survey (As Built) is required for Project Closeout. Horizontal and vertical control to be established. Survey information shall include, but not be limited to: Manholes, sewer lines, curb and gutter, light poles, sidewalk edges, all building footprints, certified grade, finish floor elevations. 1. Underground Utility survey: Contractor shall GPS underground utilities as follows: a. Survey coordinate system – State Plane. b. Water, Gas, Electric, Fiber Optic, Sewer, Storm Water, Irrigation main lines, Fire line, property line, property lines and benchmark control points. c. Top of line, finish grade at each starting point of the utility and every 20’ thereafter. d. All bends, beginning, apex, end. e. Each manhole, vault box. f. Color coding for all utilities shall follow coding for the Utility Notification System. g. Final record survey and information to be submitted in electronic and hard copy with Close Out Documents B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." E. Within 21 calendar days of the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall submit a list of all specified materials, products, and components which cannot be delivered and installed within the constraints of the Interim Schedule. 1. Project delays resulting from material, product and component availability which are not identified according within 21 calendar shall be the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor and subject to penalty. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces, unless indicated otherwise. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. D. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in‐place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 2. Except as otherwise indicated, Contractor shall notify Architect at least 72 hours in advance of any cutting activity and acquire approval prior to any of the following: a. Penetration of structural building component. b. Planned penetrations larger than one square foot which are not shown on the drawings. c. Penetration of work provided by Owner or “Others” outside of this contract. d. Penetrations affecting the operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. e. Penetrations or cutting of weather‐exposed or moisture‐resistant elements or systems. f. Penetrations affecting the visual qualities of exposed elements. g. Any element where the existence of a penetration or the process of cutting may render the element unsuitable to receive subsequent work. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Cutting: Cut in‐place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. D. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in‐place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. E. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. D. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on‐site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." E. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. B. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. SECTION 01 74 19 ‐ CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Goal is to achieve end‐of‐Project rates for recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non‐hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. 1. Temporary storage of construction waste shall be in suitable containers. Waste storage shall be housed within the construction fencing. 1.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on‐site workers. B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to D. Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on‐site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. E. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut‐Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. F. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. 3.3 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on‐site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them. SECTION 01 77 00 ‐ CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. B. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. As‐Builts D. Operations and Maintenance Manuals 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 2. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 3. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 5. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 6. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 7. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, tools, spare parts, extra materials and similar final record information. 3. Submit test/adjust/balance records. C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1.5 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest‐control final inspection report. B. Final Inspection: 1. When Contractor considers Work is complete, submit written certification: a. Contract Documents have been reviewed. b. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. c. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected in full. d. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully operational. e. Operation of systems has been demonstrated to Owner’s personnel. f. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. g. Contractor to allow 10 days notice for coordination of Final Inspection. 2. Should the Architect find Work incomplete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing listing observed deficiencies. 3. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of final completion. 4. When the Architect finds work is complete, closeout submittals will be considered. C. Reinspection Fees 1. Should status of completion of Work require reinspection by the Architect due to failure of Work to comply with Contractor’s claims on initial inspection, Owner will deduct the amount of Architect’s compensation for reinspection services from final payment to Contractor. 1.6 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy‐duty, three‐ring, vinyl‐covered, loose‐leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8‐1/2‐by‐11‐inch (215‐by‐280‐mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic‐covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.7 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Final Payment will be made to the Contractor after all listed deficiencies have been corrected, all closeout submittal have been received/approved, all certification(s) and/or authorizations from the Colorado State Labor Commission and local authorities having jurisdiction have been received and approved by the Owner. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. d. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard‐surfaced finishes to a dirt‐free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision‐obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. i. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. j. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. NO DESCRIPTION DATE 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, stating the reason for rejection. 2. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. 5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 9. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. A. Substitutions for Convenience: 1. Owner reserves the right to request consideration of a proposed substitution at any time. 2. Allowed only by specific owner permission. PART 4 ‐ EXECUTION (Not Used) SECTION 01 26 00 ‐ CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner‐Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. If Contractor proceeds without a s igned Proposal Request, it is at the Contractor's own risk. 2. Within 7 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 1.2 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION (Not Used) SECTION 01 29 00 ‐ PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: 2. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. 3. Submittal schedule. 4. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. 4. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Payment shall be based on approved Work installed and/or material properly stored as of the period ending date established at the Pre‐construction Conference. The Contractors first application for payment will not be processed unless the submittals required at the Preconstruction Conference have been accepted as final by the Owner. B. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703. E. Retainage: 1. Retainage shall be held in the amount of 10%. Retainage shall be held against each line item (Column I of the AIA Continuation Sheet) of the Schedule of Values as work is completed and/or stored throughout the project duration. 2. Upon satisfactory performance and completion of the first 50 percent of the Work, retainage may be reduced to 5% or payments equal to 100% of the value of the labor and materials incorporated in the Work thereafter may be made to the Contractor. Approval for reduction or release of retention is at the sole discretion of the Owner. 3. Remaining retainage will be paid to the Contractor at final payment in accordance with the provisions of the Supplementary General Conditions. F. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. G. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 5. Evidence that claims have been settled. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION (Not Used) SECTION 01 31 00 ‐ PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying product. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e‐mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.2 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.3 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Contractor shall submit RFIs to Architect. Architect will evaluate content of the RFI and forward RFI to appropriate consultants. 2. Architect will return RFIs with no response if submitted to Architect by entities other than Contractor or entities controlled by Contractor. 3. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. RFI's deemed to be frivolous by the Architect and his consultants will be returned to the Contractor un‐reviewed. RFI's deemed to be Proposal Requests (PR) will be reviewed and returned to the Contractor with a notice that the Architect will issue a Proposal Request. The intent of RFI's is to provide interpretations and clarifications without changing the scope, time or contract sum of the project. Failure by the Contractor to notify Architect that a response to an RFI may have cost or time implications will forfeit all rights of the Contractor to make a claim for related change to scope, time or contract sum. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716, or software‐generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 2. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow ten working days for Architect's response for each RFI. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. a. The Contractor shall not proceed with work based on any RFI response that, in the Contractor's opinion, results in an increase or decrease in scope, cost and/or time of the Work. Notify Architect and request a Proposal Request (PR) in a timely manner to avoid project delays. 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Scheduled by Owner and Architect, with Contractor in attendance. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Pre‐installation Conferences: Conduct a pre‐installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals or as agreed upon with owner. 1. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S SAFETY PROGRAM A. All contractors who perform any work under this Contract shall fully comply with the provisions of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA) and to the rules and regulations promulgated pursuant to this Act. The Contractor is responsible for safety on the project site per the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor must submit a safety program to the Owner prior to starting work on the site. This program shall indicate the Contractor's plan to comply with OSHA requirements for the various conditions of the project. The Contractor shall appoint a safety representative on site. The safety program and Contractor's safety representative names must both be posted. C. All contractors shall maintain a first aid kit and fire extinguisher in all field offices and in all gang boxes on site. Contractors engaged in welding or burning of any type shall maintain fire extinguishers at those locations at all times. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION (Not Used) SECTION 01 32 00 ‐ CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to Contractor. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. B. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. C. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. B. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones: C. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.2 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, the response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need‐to‐ know schedule responsibility. SECTION 01 33 00 ‐ SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1.2 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 21 days for review of each resubmittal. B. Electronic Submittals: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single file with transmittal form. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submittals shall be electronic format as pdf documents. Submit via email or Contractor’s FTP site. 2. Certificates, Certifications and Qualifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. B. Product Data: 1. NOTE: Architect’s material and color selections can be made only from samples. Material and color selection will not be made based on printed or electronic literature. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project‐specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 2. Samples for Verification: Submit full‐size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. E. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements." F. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures." G. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data." H. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. I. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. J. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 2.2 USE OF ARCHITECT'S ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS A. Electronic Documents are provided as a convenience to the Recipient for informational purposes only in connection with the Recipient's performance of its responsibilities and obligations relating to the Project. The Electronic Documents do not replace or supplement the paper copies of the Drawings and Specifications which are, and remain, the Contract Documents for the Project or the paper copies of any other document prepared by the Architect or his subconsultants. Recipient agrees that the Electronic Documents may not be comprehensive of all parts of the Contract Documents (addenda, supplemental instructions, Change Orders, etc.). PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Note variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work by "clouding" all variations. Variations that are not clouded will not be accepted and Work not in compliance with Contract Documents shall be removed from the project even if installed and in place. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Field measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor. C. The Contractor will retain one copy of all accepted/final submittals at the project site. At completion of the Work, submittals stored at site may be used to satisfy requirements for submittals for Record Document, O&M Manuals, and Warranties. D. Contractor shall maintain and accurately update a submittal log showing the current status of the submittals. The updated log shall be reviewed with the architect and owner at the project meetings. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. 1. The Architect’s review is for overall conformance to the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from full compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Submittals processed by the Architect are not Change Orders and do to authorize changes in the Contract Documents. B. Unreviewed or unapproved submittals shall not be used in conjunction with the Work. C. Review by the Architect and his consultants shall not relieve the Contractor from full compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.3 EXECUTION OF THE WORK A. Do not proceed with purchase, fabrication, or installation of submittal‐related work until submittals have been reviewed and approved. Work executed without prior approval shall be subject to rejection. B. Submittals marked “Revise & Resubmit” in conjunction with “Approved as Noted” shall be corrected to reflect needed changes and resubmitted as a record of installed products and/or materials. Submittals so marked may proceed with manufacture, fabrication, and installation without further Architectural review. SECTION 01 40 00 ‐ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 ‐ GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Quality‐Control: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager. B. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. C. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. D. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub‐subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. E. Experience: When used with regard to an entity or individual, "experienced" means: 1. As identified in individual specification sections. 2. If not indicated otherwise, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code. C. Neither the contractual relationships, duties or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic‐force‐resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality‐assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind‐force‐resisting system or a wind‐resisting component listed in the wind‐force‐resisting system quality‐assurance plan prepared by Architect. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. C. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality‐control service. 1.4 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. C. Factory‐Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory‐ authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other SectionsRetain general requirements in "Permits, Licenses, and Certificates" Paragraph below. Specific submittals may be specified in other Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection r eports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality‐control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 548, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, ASTM C 1093, and ASTM C 1021. Where required by individual specification sections, comply with requirements of ASTM E 548. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located. 4. Costs for retesting and re‐inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory‐authorized service representative to inspect field‐assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures." C. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre‐installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. D. Retesting/Re‐inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality‐control services, including retesting and re‐ inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in‐situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality‐control service through Contractor. F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality‐assurance and ‐control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality‐control services required by the Contract Documents. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.6 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality‐control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality‐control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 ‐ PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 ‐ EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Provide continuous Inspection of Workmanship to identify deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. B. Comply with manufacturers’ written instructions. 1. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding C. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. H. Tolerances: 1. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. 2. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances unless more stringent tolerances are specified in individual specification sections. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. 3. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Testing/Inspection Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non‐conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings, as required. 8. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified. B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency has no authority to stop the Work. 4. Agency may not assume any dutes of Contractor C. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. D. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. E. Contractor’s Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to testing agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities. a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. e. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. 4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services. 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Construction Company beyond specified requirements. F. Re‐testing required because of non‐conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price. 3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION PART 4 ‐ General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. EXECUTION 4.1 GENERAL A. Provide continuous Inspection of Workmanship to identify deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. B. Comply with manufacturers’ written instructions. 1. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding C. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement. H. Tolerances: 1. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. 2. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances unless more stringent tolerances are specified in individual specification sections. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. 3. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. NO DESCRIPTION DATE A101 LEVEL ONE FLOOR PLAN, ROOF PLAN, REFLECTED CEILING PLAN & CLERESTORY PLAN A201 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS, EXTERIOR DETIALS & WALL TYPES A221 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A301 BUILDING SECTIONS & DETAILS A561 DOOR SCHEDULE, OPENING DETAILS, FRAME TYPES M MECHANICAL MP1.0 LEGEND SHEET MP1.1 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS MP1.2 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING DETAILS AND SPECS EELECTRICAL E0 ELECTRICAL LEGEND, SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWING INDEX E1.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING AND POWER PLAN & SCHEDULES SHEET INDEX G000 COVER SHEET G100 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 01 G101 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 01 C CIVIL C200 GRADING & DEMOLITION PLAN C 100 HORIZONTAL CONTROL AND DETAILS S STRUCTURAL S101 GENERAL NOTES, SPECIAL INSPECTION TABLES, SHEET LIST S102 FOUNDATION PLAN, ROOF FRAMING PLAN, DETAILS & ELEVATIONS S103 DETAILS AARCHITECTURAL A001 ARCHITECTURAL GENERAL NOTES A002 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 02, 03 A003 SPECIFICATIONS ‐03 A004 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 03, 04 A005 SPECIFICATIONS ‐ 04, 05 2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF DISCREPANCIES ARE DISCOVERED. 1. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTORS TO REVIEW ALL OF THE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING ARCHITECTURAL, FOR WORK UNDER THEIR RESPECTIVE CONTRACTS. NO EXTRAS WILL BE ALLOWED FOR WORK SHOWN IN ANY PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR DESCRIBED IN ANY PART OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. GENERAL NOTES ‐ PROJECT PROJECT STAGING AREA BUILDING SITE